JP6423934B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a main control unit that controls the progress of a game and a sub-control unit that is controlled by various commands from the main control unit is known. For example, when the stop operation is performed, the main control means stops and displays the symbol combination as a result of the game, and pays out medals according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. When receiving a command from the main control unit, the sub control unit causes the notification unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device) to execute various notifications. Moreover, in the above-described gaming machine, a technique is known in which a sub-control unit notifies a notification unit of a specific stop operation mode (stop operation order, stop operation position). For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a technique in which a sub-control unit notifies a notification unit of a stop operation order for stopping and displaying a specific winning combination on an active line.

JP2015-29805A

  In the above gaming machine, when a malfunction occurs in the sub-control means, there is a case where it is impossible to notify the stop operation mode. In the above case, there is a problem that the game progresses in a state in which the stop operation mode cannot be notified. In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to enable notification of a stop operation mode even when a malfunction occurs in a sub-control unit.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention displays a start operation means that is operated when a game is started, a plurality of types of symbols when the game is started, as a result the symbol combination and stop display, variable display means, and dosing means which can be turned and stop operation means, the game media to be stopped operated to stop displaying the symbols, the game when the game medium is introduced start possible and to the winning area determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of winning areas including a first win area and the second win area and a third prize area and the fourth win area in each game, symbols stopped and displayed determining the combination, if the winning symbol combination including the particular winning symbol combination is determined to have been stopped and displayed along with the paid out gaming media payout number corresponding to the winning symbol combination, the specific re-Yu If replay symbol combination including the symbol combination is determined to have been stopped and displayed without paid out a game medium, it inserts a game medium and the same number of game media used in this game automatically, first winning area In the selected game, if the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, the specific winning symbol combination may be stopped and displayed. If the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode, the specific winning symbol combination may not be stopped and displayed. In the game where the winning area is won, the specific re-game symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation, and in the game where the third winning area is won, the game is stopped in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. However, in the game in which the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and the fourth winning area is won, the winning symbol combination is not stopped and displayed regardless of whether it is stopped in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. As well as a possible transition state and the non-instruction status, a main control unit comprising a command transmitting means for transmitting various commands, and the sub-control means controlled by the various commands from the main control unit, controlled by the main control unit A plurality of types of instructions including instruction information that can specify a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying a specific winning symbol combination, and instruction information that can specify a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying a specific replay symbol combination The information can be displayed, and when a winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a specific display means for displaying payout number information capable of specifying a payout number corresponding to the winning symbol combination, the main control means, In the game in which the first winning area is determined, at least the stop operation means can be operated and the last stop operation means In the period until the button is operated, the instruction information can be displayed on the specific display means, and after the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the specific display mode is different from the instruction information and different from the payout number information. In the game in which the specific display means is controlled for a predetermined length of time and then the payout amount information can be displayed on the specific display means without requiring a specific operation, and at least the game in which the second winning area is determined In the period from when the operation of the stop operation means becomes possible until the last stop operation means is operated, the instruction information can be displayed on the specific display means, and after the specific re-game symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the instruction information hidden, the predetermined time length, Ri duration der the player can recognize that a particular display means are controlled in a particular display mode, the command transmitting means, The first command is transmitted in the game won by the three winning areas, the second command is transmitted in the game won by the fourth winning area, and the first operation mode is changed in the instruction state in the game won by the first winning area. A third command that can be specified is transmitted, and a fourth command in which the first operation mode cannot be specified is transmitted in the non-instructed state. When one command is received, one of a plurality of types of effects including the first effect is determined, and when a second command is received, among the plurality of types of effects including the second effect and not including the first effect When the fourth command is received, any one of a plurality of types of effects including the second effect and not including the first effect is determined .

  According to the above configuration, the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed by the specific display means controlled by the main control means. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the sub-control means, the stop operation mode can be notified by the specific display means controlled by the main control means. According to the configuration of the present invention, the specific display means notifies the payout number in addition to the stop operation mode. Therefore, for example, the number of display means can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which display means for notifying the stop operation mode and display means for notifying the number of payouts are provided separately.

  By the way, in the configuration in which the stop operation mode and the payout number are displayed by one specific display means, when the payout number is notified immediately after the stop operation mode, the stop operation mode is notified or the number of payouts is notified. The inconvenience that it is easy to confuse is assumed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present invention controls the specific display means for the instruction information, and after the symbol combination related to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the identification is different from the instruction information and is different from the payout number information. In the display mode, the specific display means is controlled over a predetermined length of time, and thereafter, the specific display means can be controlled to the payout number information without requiring a specific operation. According to the above configuration, it is easy to recognize that the instruction information is switched to the payout number information. Therefore, the inconvenience described above is suppressed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to notify the stop operation mode even when a malfunction occurs in the sub-control means.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows each symbol arranged in each reel. It is a figure for demonstrating a symbol display area. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol code table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination rule table. It is a figure for demonstrating the replay which stops in each stop operation order. It is a figure for demonstrating the bell stopped in each stop operation order. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning combination which stops in each stop operation position. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific operation aspect. It is a conceptual diagram of a transfer symbol prescription table. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of an instruction | indication state. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication determination table in each instruction | indication state including the state in AT. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication determination table in the completion preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in AT state and a start preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in a completion preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating each command transmitted from the main control board. It is a conceptual diagram of a rotation production | presentation determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of an AT determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication effect determination table in an AT state and a start preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating each instruction | indication effect. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication effect determination table in a completion preparation state. It is a figure for demonstrating each pushing order application effect. It is a conceptual diagram of an effect lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating aim production. It is a figure for demonstrating the display time of instruction information, and the execution time of instruction | indication effect. It is a flowchart of a starting process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a setting change process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the game control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of an initial setting process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the automatic insertion process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the game start pre-processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the insertion medal acceptance process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a BET operation acceptance process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the adjustment operation acceptance process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a lottery execution process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the internal lottery process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the rotation effect determination process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the instruction number determination process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the wait process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the stop process of the main CPU. It is a conceptual diagram of a priority order storage area. It is a flowchart of the priority order storing process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a stop control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the display determination process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the hopper drive process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the game state transition process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of each process of the game state transition process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the interruption process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a sub activation process of the sub CPU. It is a flowchart of each task of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process of the sub CPU. It is a flowchart of effect control processing of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the start operation process of the sub CPU. It is a figure for demonstrating each instruction information of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display time of the instruction information in 5th Embodiment, and the execution time of instruction | indication effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction | indication indicator of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of 7th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram of the instruction | indication determination table of 7th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram of each command of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the bonus notification state of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction | indication indicator of a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the display mode of the instruction | indication indicator of a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating each structure of a modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Structure of gaming machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. A player plays a game with the gaming machine 1 using a game medium (for example, a medal or a game ball). In the present embodiment, a gaming machine 1 (pachislot machine) in which medals are used as gaming media is illustrated.

  The gaming machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 2 having an opening on the front side (player side) and a front door 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the internal structure of the cabinet 2. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view of the rear surface of the front door 3 (the surface on the inner side of the gaming machine 1). As shown in FIG. 2, the cabinet 2 is provided with a hinge mechanism 2a. The front door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge mechanism 2a so that the opening of the cabinet 2 can be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of (14 in the example of FIG. 1) housing lamps 5 are provided on the peripheral side of the front door 3. Each housing lamp 5 includes, for example, a light emitter such as a light emitting diode and a light transmissive lens that covers the light emitter. The housing lamp 5 emits light in a manner corresponding to each effect in the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a waist panel 6. On the waist panel 6, the name of the gaming machine 1 is drawn. A light emitter that irradiates the waist panel 6 is provided inside the gaming machine 1 (front door 3). For example, a light emitting diode or a cold cathode tube is adopted as the light emitter that irradiates the waist panel 6. In addition, a tray unit 7 for storing medals is provided below the waist panel 6. The tray unit 7 is provided so that the player can freely take out the stored medals.

  The front door 3 is provided with a medal insertion portion 8 having an opening for inserting medals and a medal payout opening 9 for discharging medals from the inside of the gaming machine 1. When a prescribed number (three) of medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 8, the game can be started. The prescribed number is set according to the state of the game. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 9 are stored in the tray unit 7.

  A panel 10 is provided on the front center side of the front door 3. A substantially rectangular display window 11 is formed in the center of the panel 10. From the display window 11, a plurality of reels 12 (12L, 12C, 12R) inside the cabinet 2 can be visually recognized.

  Each reel 12 includes a substantially cylindrical drum portion and a belt-like sheet member attached to the outer peripheral surface of the drum portion. The sheet member of the reel 12 is light transmissive, and a plurality of types of patterns are drawn on it. The reels 12 are rotatably provided and are arranged in the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. Specifically, the reels 12 are arranged so that the rotation axes are positioned on the same straight line. Each reel 12 is fixed to a reel support 12F. Stepping motors 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) are provided on each of the reels 12 (not shown), and each reel 12 is rotated by each stepping motor 101.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the symbols arranged on each reel 12 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer periphery of each of the plurality of reels 12 is divided into 21 frames. As shown in FIG. 4, one symbol is drawn on each frame, and a plurality of types of symbols including a “bell” symbol and a “replay x” symbol are drawn on each reel 12. In the present embodiment, the Nth frame from the bottom of the symbol array shown in FIG. 4 (N is an integer from a numerical value “0” to a numerical value “20”) may be described as a symbol position “N”. For example, the symbol at the symbol position “5” of the left reel 12L is a red seven symbol. Each symbol of the reel 12 can be generally identified by the player even when the reel 12 is rotating. Therefore, the player can perform an operation to stop the reel 12 (a so-called eye-opening) at a timing when a specific symbol passes through the display window 11. In FIG. 4, each symbol is shown in a color different from the actual color of each symbol.

  Three symbols for each reel 12 are stopped and displayed on the display window 11 of the front door 3 shown in FIG. That is, when all the reels 12 are stopped, a total of nine symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 11. In the present embodiment, an area where each symbol is displayed is referred to as a “symbol display region”.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the symbol display area. As shown in FIG. 5, the symbol display area includes each unit area U (L, C, R). In each unit area U, one symbol is displayed. Each unit area U includes a unit area UL in which symbols of the left reel 12L are displayed, a unit area UC in which symbols of the middle reel 12C are displayed, and a unit in which symbols of the right reel 12R are displayed. And the region UR. Each unit area UL includes a unit area UL1 located in the upper stage, a unit area UL2 located in the middle stage, and a unit area UL3 located in the lower stage. Each unit area UC includes a unit area UC1 located in the upper stage, a unit area UC2 located in the middle stage, and a unit area UC3 located in the lower stage. Each unit area UR includes the unit area UR1 located in the upper stage and the middle stage. The unit region UR2 located at the bottom and the unit region UR3 located at the lower stage are included.

  When a prescribed number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion unit 8, an effective line is set. The effective line is composed of any one unit area U of the reels 12L, one unit area U of the reels 12C, and any one unit area U of the reels 12R among the unit areas U. It is an area. The effective line of the present embodiment is a line that connects the unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR2 of the reel 12R among the unit areas U that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display area.

  A combination of symbols as a result of the game is stopped and displayed on the active line. When a combination of symbols predetermined on the active line is stopped, a profit is given to the player according to the stopped combination of symbols. For example, when a combination of symbols related to winning is stopped and displayed on the active line, a medal is awarded to the player. Further, when a combination of symbols relating to replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player is given the right to replay. Specifically, when the combination of symbols related to the re-game is displayed in the current game, the next game can be started without requiring medal insertion. The combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is determined for each game in accordance with the result of an internal lottery process to be described later.

  In the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the upper unit area UC1 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an “upper line”. Similarly, a line connecting the middle unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the middle unit area UR2 of the reel 12R (effective line in this embodiment) may be referred to as a “middle line”. is there. In addition, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the lower unit area UC3 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a “lower line”. In addition, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an “upper right line”. Similarly, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a “right downward line”.

  Each reel 12 is provided with a backlight for illuminating the sheet member of the reel 12 from the inside (not shown). Specifically, each of the reels 12 includes a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the upper line of the reel 12, a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the middle line, and a backlight that illuminates the unit area U of the lower line. Provided.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 includes a loadable indicator lamp 13, a BET lamp 14 (14 a, 14 b, 14 c), a start lamp 15, an instruction indicator 16, a stored number indicator 17, a replay indicator lamp 18, A plurality of indicators (hereinafter referred to as “main indicator ML”) including a weight lamp 19 and a stop lamp 20 are provided. Each lamp of the main display ML is controlled by a main CPU 301 described later.

  The insertable display lamp 13 notifies whether or not a medal from the medal insertion unit 8 can be received. Specifically, in a state where a medal from the medal insertion unit 8 can be received, the insertion possibility display lamp 13 is lit. On the other hand, in a state where medals cannot be received, the insertion possible display lamp 13 is turned off. For example, the period during which the reel 12 is rotating is in a state where no medal can be received, and therefore, the insertable display lamp 13 is turned off. On the other hand, when all the reels 12 are stopped and a medal can be received, the thrown-in indicator lamp 13 is lit.

  The BET lamp 14 displays the number of betting medals. The BET lamp 14 includes a single lamp 14a, a double lamp 14b, and a triple lamp 14c. When one betting medal is set, one lamp 14a is turned on. When two betting medals are set, one lamp 14a and two lamps 14b are turned on, and three betting medals are set. And the single lamp 14a, the double lamp 14b, and the triple lamp 14c are turned on.

  The start lamp 15 notifies whether or not a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) can be accepted. Specifically, the start lamp 15 is turned on when a specified number of betting medals are set or when a combination of symbols relating to replaying is stopped on the active line.

  The instruction display 16 is controlled by the main CPU 301 and displays instruction information for instructing the operation mode (push order) of the stop button 25. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information on the instruction display 16 in each game in the AT state. The instruction display 16 displays the number of medals awarded to the player when the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the symbol combination “bell-bell-bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line, nine medals are given to the player, and the indication display 16 displays the number “9”. That is, the instruction display 16 is a display that combines a display function of instruction information with a conventional payout number display that displays the payout number of medals. The instruction display 16 of this embodiment is a 2-digit 7-segment display.

  The number of medals awarded to the player can be electrically stored (stored) in the gaming machine 1 (main RAM 303 described later). In the present embodiment, the number of stored medals is referred to as “credit number”. The number of credits is added when a medal is awarded as a result of the game. The credit amount is added when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 in a state where a prescribed number of betting medals are inserted.

  The stored number display 17 displays the number of credits. Specifically, the stored number display unit 17 variably displays the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “50” that is the upper limit value of the credit number according to the stored credit number.

  The replay display lamp 18 notifies that replay is in progress. Specifically, the re-game display lamp 18 is lit until the next game ends after the combination of symbols relating to the re-game is stopped and displayed on the active line in the current game. When the re-game display lamp 18 is lit, the player is notified that the next game start operation can be performed without using a medal.

  The weight lamp 19 is lit during a wait period from when a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) is started until rotation of each reel 12 is started. The wait period is provided in order to make the average time length required for one game equal to or greater than a predetermined value (about 4.1 seconds). The stop lamp 20 notifies that the game is in a stop state that is impossible.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 has a 1 BET button 21, a MAX-BET button 22, a checkout button 23, a start lever 24, a plurality of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R), an effect button 26, and direction designation. A plurality of operation units including buttons 27 are provided. Each operation unit is operated by a player.

  The 1BET button 21 is operated when setting one betting medal using the stored medals. For example, when the 1BET button 21 is operated in a state where no betting medal is set, a numerical value “1” is subtracted from the number of credits, and one betting medal is set. That is, the player can set one betting medal using the stored medal by operating the 1BET button 21.

  The MAX-BET button 22 is operated when setting a specified number of betting medals using the stored medals. For example, when the MAX-BET button 22 is operated in a state where no betting medal is set, three (specified number) are subtracted from the number of credits, and three betting medals are set.

  The settlement button 23 is operated when a medal stored as the number of credits and a betting medal are settled. When the checkout button 23 is operated, the total number of medals including credits and betting medals is paid out from the medal payout opening 9. Note that the betting medal may be settled by the first operation of the settlement button 23 and the credits may be settled by the second operation.

  The start lever 24 is operated by the player when starting the game. The player can instruct the start of the game by performing a start operation on the start lever 24 in a state where the game can be started. The start lever 24 of the present embodiment can tilt in any direction of 360 degrees from a state substantially perpendicular to the front door 3. In addition, the handle part of the start lever 24 is formed of a light-transmitting resin and incorporates a lever effect lamp 42. The lever effect lamp 42 lights up in a predetermined effect.

  The stop button 25 is operated by the player when the reel 12 is stopped. The stop button 25 includes a stop button 25L, a stop button 25C, and a stop button 25R. The stop button 25L corresponds to the reel 12L, the stop button 25C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the stop button 25R corresponds to the reel 12R. When the stop button 25 corresponding to the reel 12 is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”) during the period in which the reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 stops.

  Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the first stop operation in each game is referred to as a first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Control in which the gaming machine 1 (main CPU 301 described later) stops the reel 12 based on the first stop operation is referred to as first stop control. Similarly, the reel 12 stop control based on the second stop operation is referred to as second stop control, and the reel 12 stop control based on the third stop operation is referred to as third stop control. Further, the symbol position of the reel 12 positioned in the middle line of the display window 11 at the time when the stop operation is performed is referred to as a stop operation position.

  When all the reels 12 are stopped, the combination of symbols as a result of the game is displayed on the active line, and the game ends. As will be described later, when the game is started, each reel 12 is accelerated to a certain rotational speed. During a period in which each reel 12 has a constant rotation speed (a period in which the reel 12 is constantly rotating), a stop operation for stopping and displaying the game result on the active line becomes possible. On the other hand, in the acceleration period from the start of rotation of each reel 12 to the steady rotation, even if the reel 12 is rotating, a stop operation for displaying a game result is not accepted.

  The effect button 26 is operated by the player when giving an instruction regarding the effect. For example, the user can instruct execution of a specific effect by operating the effect button 26. That is, the specific effect is executed when the effect button 26 is operated (trigger). Note that the MAX-BET button 22 can also have the function of the effect button 26. According to the above configuration, the effect button 26 is omitted, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The direction designation button 27 is operated by the player when a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30, for example. The direction designation button 27 includes an upper button, a lower button, a right button, and a left button. For example, by operating the direction designation button 27, the cursor for designating options displayed on the menu image can be moved. Specifically, when the up button is operated, the cursor in the menu image moves upward. Similarly, when the lower button is operated, the cursor moves downward, when the right button is operated, the cursor moves rightward, and when the left button is operated, the cursor moves leftward.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 of the front door 3 includes a plurality of effect lamps 28 (28 a to 28 e) and a plurality of stop operation order display lamps in addition to the main display ML (start lamp 15 and the like) described above. 29 (29L, 29C, 29R). Each lamp of the main display ML is controlled by the main CPU 301, while each effect lamp 28 and each stop operation order display lamp 29 are controlled by a sub CPU 412 described later. The effect lamp 28a and the effect lamp 28b among the plurality of effect lamps 28 are provided on the left side of the display window 11 in front view, and the effect lamps 28e to 28e are on the right side of the display window 11 in front view. Is provided. Each effect lamp 28 notifies the current game state and the like.

  Each stop operation order display lamp 29 is provided in an area below the display window 11 in the panel 10 and notifies the operation order of each stop button 25. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 29L is provided at a position corresponding to the reel 12L (lower left side of the display window 11), and the stop operation order display lamp 29C is set at a position corresponding to the reel 12C (the display window 11 of the display window 11). The stop operation sequence display lamp 29R is provided at a position corresponding to the reel 12R (lower right side of the display window 11). For example, it is assumed that the stop button 25R is notified by the first stop operation, the stop button 25C by the second stop operation, and the order of the stop button 25L by the third stop operation (so-called reverse pressing) is notified to the player. In the above case, the stop operation order display lamp 29R is lit when the game is started, the stop operation order display lamp 29C is lit after the stop button 25R is operated, and the stop operation order is displayed after the stop button 25C is operated. The display lamp 29L is lit.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a liquid crystal display device 30 that displays various images is provided above the display window 11 of the front door 3. The liquid crystal display device 30 displays a moving image and a still image according to an effect executed on the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 30 notifies information relating to a result of an internal lottery process described later, information suggesting a gaming state, and the like. Moreover, the liquid crystal display device 30 is larger than the instruction | indication indicator 16, as understood from FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front door 3 is provided with speakers 31 (31L, 31R) and speakers 32 (32L, 32R). The speaker 31 is provided on the lower end side of the front door 3, and includes a speaker 31L attached to the left side when viewed from the player side and a speaker 31R attached to the right side. The speaker 32 is provided on the upper end side of the front door 3 and includes a speaker 32L attached to the left side as viewed from the player side and a speaker 32R attached to the right side. The speaker 31 and the speaker 32 output sound (music, sound and sound effect) according to the production. For example, the speaker 31 and the speaker 32 output sound related to the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 30, the effect lamp 28, the housing lamp 5, the stop operation order display lamp 29, or the lever effect lamp 42. To do. The speaker 31 and the speaker 32 are attached to the back surface of the front door 3, and a plurality of sound emitting holes are formed on the surface of the front door 3 at positions corresponding to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a return button 33. The return button 33 is operated in order to clear the medal clogging in the medal flow path inside the gaming machine 1. By operating the return button 33, medals jammed in the medal flow path are discharged from the medal payout opening 9.

  The front door 3 is provided with a locking device 4 in which a keyhole is formed. When the locking device 4 of the front door 3 is engaged with a locking piece (not shown) of the cabinet 2, the front door 3 is locked. As shown in FIG. 1, the keyhole of the locking device 4 is located in front of the front door 3, and a key (not shown) for unlocking the front door 3 can be inserted. As will be described later, various operation units (for example, a setting change button 37) are provided inside the cabinet 2. Each operation section inside the cabinet 2 is operated by a key manager (for example, a store clerk in a game hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed) that unlocks the front door 3.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a selector 34 capable of switching the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. Specifically, the selector 34 includes a solenoid (not shown), and the medal flow path is switched according to the ON / OFF state of the solenoid. Further, the ON / OFF state of the solenoid is changed depending on whether or not the insertion of medals is permitted. For example, when the insertion of medals is permitted, the solenoid of the selector 34 is in the ON state, and the selector 34 guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 into the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, an insertion medal guide member 522 is provided in the vicinity of the right side of the selector 34 when viewed from the inside of the gaming machine 1. The inserted medal guide member 522 guides the medal that has passed through the selector 34 to a hopper 520 provided in the cabinet 2.

  On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is not permitted (for example, when the reel 12 is rotating), the solenoid of the selector 34 is in the OFF state, and the selector 34 uses the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 as a gaming machine. Lead outside of 1. Further, the selector 34 guides a foreign object (for example, an illegal medal) inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 to the outside of the gaming machine 1 even when the insertion of the medal is permitted. As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge medal guide member 523 is provided near the lower side of the selector 34. The discharged medal guide member 523 guides medals and the like from the selector 34 to the medal payout opening 9 on the front side of the front door 3.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a hopper 520 having a tank portion 521 a for storing medals and having a discharge slit 521 b for discharging medals is provided inside the cabinet 2. The medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 are stored in the tank unit 521a, and the medals stored in the tank unit 521a are paid out to the tray unit 7 from the discharge slit 521b through the medal payout opening 9. For example, the hopper 520 pays out medals when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line or when the checkout button 23 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a payout medal guide member 524 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. The payout medal guide member 524 guides the medal from the hopper 520 to the medal payout exit 9. Specifically, the payout medal guide member 524 has an opening, and the opening faces the discharge slit 521b of the hopper 520 in a state where the front door 3 is closed. The medals discharged from the discharge slit 521b enter the opening of the payout medal guide member 524 and are guided to the medal payout exit 9 by the payout medal guide member 524.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an auxiliary storage portion 530 is provided inside the cabinet 2. The auxiliary storage unit 530 stores medals overflowing from the hopper 520. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides the hole which penetrates the bottom part of the auxiliary storage part 530, and the bottom part of the cabinet 2, and discharges the medal overflowing from the hopper to the exterior of the gaming machine 1 through the hole.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2.
Specifically, the main control board 300 is housed in a transparent board case and attached to the back plate of the cabinet 2. Various electronic components including a later-described main CPU 301 are mounted on the main control board 300. The main control board 300 is electrically connected to various boards including a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub-control board 400, and a power board 500, which will be described later, through connectors (not shown). Note that the various substrates described above may be formed of a single substrate or a plurality of substrates.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a setting display unit 36 and a setting change button 37 are provided inside the cabinet 2. The setting display unit 36 displays the setting value of the gaming machine 1. The set value is a numerical value related to the payout rate of the gaming machine 1, and various lotteries are executed with a probability corresponding to the set value in each game. For example, setting values “1” to “6” are provided, and the setting value “6” has the highest payout rate. In the present embodiment, when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change keyhole (not shown) and rotated, the setting display unit 36 displays the setting value.

  The setting change button 37 is operated when changing the numerical value of the setting display unit 36. Each time the setting change button 37 is operated, the setting display unit 36 adds and displays a numerical value one by one. For example, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where the numerical value “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value “2” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. However, when the setting change button 37 is operated while the numerical value “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. When the start lever 24 is operated during a period in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 at the time of the operation is stored as the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a sub control board 400 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. The sub-control board 400 includes various boards including an effect control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2. The power supply device 510 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter (both not shown), generates a DC voltage from an AC voltage supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and generates a plurality of types from the generated DC voltage. Generate DC voltage. For example, the power supply device 510 has a DC voltage of 32 V used for driving a motor or a solenoid, a DC voltage of 12 V supplied to the liquid crystal display device 30, and a voltage of 5 V supplied to an electronic circuit board (for example, the main control board 300). DC voltage is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply device 510 is provided with a power button 511 and a reset button 512. When the power button 511 is turned on, power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power button 511 is turned off, the power is shut off. The reset button 512 is operated when resetting a gaming state or the like. Specifically, when a reset button is operated, a predetermined storage area of a main RAM 303 described later is reset to an initial value.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply device 510 is provided with a shielding plate 513. The shielding plate 513 is located on the front side of the power button 511 and the reset button 512. Further, the shielding plate 513 can move to a position where the power button 511 and the reset button 512 are shielded and a position where the power button 511 and the reset button 512 are not shielded. Specifically, when the front door 3 is closed, the shielding plate 513 shields the power button 511 and the reset button 512. According to the above configuration, for example, an unauthorized act of inserting a wire from the outside of the gaming machine 1 into the sound emission hole of the speaker 31 and operating the power button 511 or the reset button 512 inside the gaming machine 1 is suppressed.

<Circuit machine circuit>
This is the end of the description of the structure of the gaming machine 1. Hereinafter, the function of each circuit provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming machine 1 includes a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a main control board 300, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305. Note that the main CPU 301, the main ROM 302, and the main RAM 303 may be provided as separate electronic devices, or may be provided as a one-chip microcomputer in which each element is integrally configured.

  The main ROM 302 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301 and various data (for example, a winning area lottery table) in a nonvolatile manner. The main RAM 303 stores various data used in each process executed by the main CPU 301.

  The main CPU 301 reads various control programs stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined processing in accordance with the progress of the game. Control the equipment.

  The random number generator 304 generates a random value R1 used in an internal lottery process to be described later. The random number generator 304 of this embodiment includes a counter circuit, a sampling circuit, and a pulse generation circuit (all not shown), and generates a hardware random number. Specifically, the pulse generation circuit outputs a signal to the counter circuit at a predetermined cycle. The numerical value of the counter circuit is incremented by “1” every time a signal is input from the pulse generation circuit. The sampling circuit stores the numerical value of the counter circuit as the random number value R1 when the player starts the game. The random value R1 is generated in the range of numerical values “0” to “65535”. A software random number may be adopted as the random value R1.

  In the present embodiment, a random value R2 is generated in addition to the random value R1. The random number value R2 is a software random number acquired from a register built in the main CPU 301, and is generated in the range of numerical values “0” to “255”. As will be described later, the random value R2 is used in the spinning effect determination process. Further, the main CPU 301 generates a random value R3. The random number value R3 is a hardware random number generated in the range of numerical values “0” to “65535”, like the random number value R1. The random value R3 is used in an AT determination process described later. A software random number may be adopted as the random value R3.

  The I / F circuit 305 inputs a signal from each switch SW (for example, the start switch 24SW) of each operation unit (for example, the start lever 24) and a signal from each sensor SE (for example, the medal sensor 34SE) to the main CPU 301. The signal from each switch SW and each sensor SE is a high level or low level signal. In the present embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a first level (high level or low level) signal is represented as an ON signal, and a second level (low level or high level) signal is represented as an OFF signal. To do. Whether the first level of the ON signal is high level or low level is set according to the type of the switch SW or sensor SE.

  The I / F circuit 305 outputs various signals for driving the main display ML, the hopper 520, and each reel 12 to the outside of the main control board 300. Further, the I / F circuit 305 outputs various commands to the sub control board 400. In order to prevent an illegal command from being input to the main control board, the command from the sub control board 400 is not received by the main control board 300.

  A signal from the main control board 300 is input to the reel board 100. The reel substrate 100 outputs a drive pulse to each reel 12 in response to a signal from the main control substrate 300. Each stepping motor 101 of each reel 12 is driven in accordance with a driving pulse from the reel substrate 100.

  The stepping motor 101 includes a plurality (four) of coils. Among the coils, the excitation coil combination is sequentially switched every time a drive pulse is input from the reel substrate 100, and the reels 12 are rotated by sequentially switching the excitation coil combinations. Specifically, when the combination of the excited coils of the stepping motor 101 is switched once, the reel 12 rotates by a predetermined angle. For example, when the pulse is applied 24 times, the reel 12 rotates by an angle corresponding to one frame (unit area U), and when the pulse is applied 504 times, the reel 12 rotates once. In the above configuration, the rotation speed of the reel 12 increases as the time interval at which the drive pulse is applied is shorter.

  The main control board 300 receives ON / OFF signals from a plurality of reel sensors 111 (111L, 111C, 111R) via the reel board 100. Of the reel sensors 111, the reel sensor 111L corresponds to the reel 12L, the reel sensor 111C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the reel sensor 111R corresponds to the reel 12R. Each reel sensor 111 outputs an ON signal when the rotation angle of the corresponding reel 12 is the reference position. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of each reel 12 is other than the reference position, each reel sensor 111 outputs an OFF signal. The main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 can determine the rotation angle of each reel 12 from the signal from each reel sensor 111 and the number of times the drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101.

  The relay board 200 relays a signal from the main control board 300 to the main display ML. In response to the signal output from the main control board 300, the main display ML is driven. The relay board 200 relays an ON / OFF signal input to the main control board 300 from each sensor (such as a start switch 24SW described later) that detects the operation of each operation unit (such as the start lever 24). Specifically, the relay board 200 relays ON / OFF signals from the 1BET switch 21SW, the MAX-BET switch 22SW, the settlement switch 23SW, the start switch 24SW, the stop switch 25SW, and the medal sensor 34SE as shown in FIG. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the power supply board 500 relays ON / OFF signals of various sensors or switches including the full sensor 530SE, the reset switch 512SE, and the payout sensor 112SE.

  The 1BET switch 21SW detects an operation of the 1BET button 21 by the player. The ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input, the main CPU 301 adds one medal to the betting medal.

  The MAX-BET switch 22SW detects the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 by the player. The ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 through the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input, the main CPU 301 sets a prescribed number of medals as betting medals.

  The settlement switch 23SW detects the operation of the settlement button 23 by the player. The ON signal from the settlement switch 23SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200.

  When an ON signal is input from the settlement switch 23SW, or when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 outputs a hopper drive signal to the hopper 520. The hopper drive signal is input from the main control board 300 to the hopper 520 through the power supply board 500. The hopper 520 pays out medals when a hopper drive signal is input.

  The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal to the main control board 300 every time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. Specifically, a payout sensor 112SE is provided at a position where a medal passing through the discharge slit 521b of the hopper 520 is detected. The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal when a medal is detected. The payout signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. The main CPU 301 can determine the number of medals paid out by counting the number of times the payout signal is input.

  Full tank sensor 530SE detects that auxiliary storage unit 530 is full. Specifically, the full tank sensor 530SE is provided at a predetermined height from the bottom of the auxiliary storage unit 530. When the medals inside the auxiliary storage unit 530 increase and reach the position of the full tank sensor 530SE, an ON signal Is output to the main control board 300. The ON signal of the full sensor 530SE is input to the main control board 300 through the power supply board 500. When the ON signal of the full sensor 530SE is input, the main CPU 301 displays a message “hopper full error” on the liquid crystal display device 30, for example, and shifts to an error state. When the message is displayed, for example, after an amusement shop clerk collects medals in the auxiliary storage unit 530, the error state is canceled by operating the reset button 512.

  The power switch 511SW is switched to an ON state or an OFF state by operating the power button 511. When the power switch 511SW is in the ON state, power is supplied from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1, and when the power switch 511SW is in the OFF state, the power from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1 is shut off. The power supply device 510 generates a DC voltage when power is supplied. The DC voltage generated by the power supply device 510 is supplied to various devices including the hopper 520 through the power supply substrate 500.

  The reset switch 512SW is provided in the power supply device 510 and outputs a reset signal to the main control board 300 when the reset button 512 is operated. The reset signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. When the main CPU 301 receives the reset signal, the main CPU 301 initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, for example, cancels the error state. Note that a plurality of reset switches 512SW (reset buttons 512) may be provided. For example, in addition to the reset switch 512SW provided in the power supply device 510, the lock device 4 may be provided with a reset switch. In the above configuration, for example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking device 4 and the key is rotated to the right, the front door 3 is unlocked, and when the key is rotated to the left, a reset signal is output from the reset switch. An output configuration is preferably employed.

  The setting change switch 37SW shown in FIG. 6 detects the operation of the setting change button 37. The ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300. When an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW, the main CPU 301 updates the display on the setting display unit 36. When an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW during a period when the setting value is not displayed on the setting display unit 36, the main CPU 301 determines a predetermined value in the same manner as when a reset signal is input from the reset switch 512SW. It is good also as a structure which performs reset operation.

  The medal sensor 34SE detects medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8. Specifically, the medal sensor 34SE outputs an ON signal when a medal is located inside the selector 34 in the medal flow path. On the other hand, the medal sensor 34SE outputs an OFF signal when no medal is located inside the selector 34. The ON / OFF signal from the medal sensor 34SE is input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. In addition to the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 described above, a medal sensor may be provided on the inserted medal guide member 522 located downstream of the selector 34. In the above configuration, when the ON signal of the medal sensor of the inserted medal guide member 522 is input after the ON signal of the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 is input, the main CPU 301 determines that the medal has been inserted. Also good. On the other hand, for example, when the ON signal of the medal sensor of the inserted medal guide member 522 is not input after the ON signal of the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 is input, there is a possibility that the medal stays in the medal flow path. Therefore, the main CPU 301 may notify an error.

  ON / OFF signals from a plurality of stop switches 25SW (25SWL, 25SWC, 25SWR) are input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. Of the stop switches 25SW, the stop switch 25SWL corresponds to the stop button 25L, the stop switch 25SWC corresponds to the stop button 25C, and the stop switch 25SWR corresponds to the stop button 25R. The main CPU 301 performs stop control of the reel 12 corresponding to the stop switch 25SW to which the ON signal is input. Specifically, when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWL, the reel 12L is controlled to stop. Similarly, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the reel 12C when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWC, and performs stop control of the reel 12R when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWR.

  The start switch 24SW detects the operation of the start lever 24 by the player. The ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal is input from the start switch 24SW, the main CPU 301 controls, for example, each stepping motor 101 to rotate each reel 12. Further, an ON signal from the setting change switch 37 </ b> SW is input to the main control board 300.

  The start switch 24SW of the present embodiment is formed so as to be able to detect the direction in which the start lever 24 is operated. Specifically, the start switch 24SW can individually detect any of push-up operation for pushing up the start lever 24, push-down operation for pushing down, right-hand operation for tilting to the right, and left-hand operation for tilting to the left as viewed from the player side. is there. For example, when the start switch 24SW is operated to the right, the start switch 24SWU that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pushed up, the start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pushed down, and ON The sensor includes a start switch 24SWR that outputs a signal and a start switch 24SWL that outputs an ON signal when operated to the left. According to the above configuration, for example, it is possible to vary the effect that is executed when the start lever 24 is pressed and when the start lever 24 is pressed.

<Sub control board>
The sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 30, the speakers (31, 32), and each lamp (for example, the effect lamp 28). As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control board 400 includes a plurality of boards including an effect control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430. The sub-control board 400 includes various sensors including an effect button switch 26SW and a direction specifying switch 27SW, a housing lamp 5, an effect lamp 28, a stop operation order display lamp 29, and a lever effect lamp 42. Various lamps including them are electrically connected.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the effect control board 410 includes an I / F circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a sub ROM 413, and a sub RAM 414. The effect control board 410 (sub CPU 412) controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, and the lever effect lamp 42, and the sound board 430. The effect control board 410 gives a command to the image control board 420 to display each image on the liquid crystal display device 30.

  The sub ROM 413 stores a control program executed by the sub CPU 412 and various data. For example, an effect lottery table for determining the type of effect and lamp data indicating flashing patterns of various lamps are stored in the sub ROM 413.

  The sub RAM 414 functions as a work area for storing various data in a volatile manner. The I / F circuit 411 receives a command from the main control board 300 (I / F circuit 305). The command received by the I / F circuit 411 is supplied to the sub CPU 412. The command received by the I / F circuit 411 is, for example, a display winning combination command indicating the type of winning combination stopped on the active line.

  The sub CPU 412 executes a control program stored in the sub ROM 413, and controls various lamps (for example, the housing lamp 5) and the sound board 430 based on each data stored in the sub ROM 413. For example, the sub CPU 412 reads data indicating the blinking pattern of the housing lamp 5 from the sub ROM 413 and blinks the housing lamp 5. Further, the sub CPU 412 generates a random value R4 used in an effect control process to be described later. As the random value R4, for example, a random number in the range of 0 to 65535 is preferably employed. Note that the sub ROM 413 may be composed of a single electronic component or a plurality of electronic components (storage devices).

  The image control board 420 displays various images on the liquid crystal display device 30 in accordance with commands from the effect control board 410. As shown in FIG. 6, the image control board 420 includes an image control CPU 421, an image control ROM 422, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 423, a CGROM 424, and a VRAM 425.

  The image control CPU 421 executes a control program stored in the image control ROM 422 and gives an instruction according to a command from the effect control board 410 to the VDP 423. The CGROM 424 stores compressed and encoded image data (for example, texture data). The VDP 423 includes an image decoder and a drawing circuit (both not shown). When an instruction from the image control CPU 421 is input to the VDP 423, the image decoder reads image data from the CGROM 424 in accordance with the instruction. The image decoder decompresses (decodes) the read image data and stores it in the VRAM 425. The drawing circuit displays various images on the liquid crystal display device 30 in accordance with the image data stored in the VRAM 425.

  The sound board 430 is controlled by the sub CPU 412 to generate an acoustic signal. The acoustic signal generated by the sound board 430 is supplied to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32 and output as a sound wave. As shown in FIG. 6, the sound board 430 includes a sound source IC 431 and a sound source ROM 432. The sub CPU 412 controls the sound board 430 (sound source IC 431) in accordance with a command from the main control board 300.

  The sound source ROM 432 compresses and stores a plurality of sound data. Each sound data is data indicating each sound including, for example, a music piece in a specific game state, a sound output every time the player operates the stop button 25, and an error sound output in an error state.

  The sound source IC 431 generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data in the sound source ROM 432. The sound source IC 431 includes a decoder, a control register, and an A / D converter (all not shown). The decoder of the sound source IC 431 reads sound data from the sound source ROM 432 in accordance with an instruction from the sub CPU 412. The decoder of the sound source IC 431 adjusts the volume of the read sound data and then stores the sound data in the control register. A plurality of acoustic data is stored in the control register, and each acoustic data stored in the control register is supplied to the A / D converter in the stored order. The A / D converter generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data and supplies it to the amplifier 433. The amplifier 433 amplifies the acoustic signal supplied from the sound source IC 431 (A / D converter) and supplies it to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32. Note that a CPU that controls the sound source IC 431 may be provided separately from the sub CPU 412 and the image control CPU 421.

<Each data used by main CPU>
The description of each circuit of the gaming machine 1 is as described above. Hereinafter, various data stored in the main ROM 302 will be described with reference to the drawings. In the main ROM 302, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 7, the symbol code table shown in FIG. 8, the winning area lottery table shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 10, the winning combination defining table shown in FIG. A variety of data including a transition symbol definition table shown in FIG. 18, an instruction determination table shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a spinning effect determination table shown in FIG. 23, and an AT determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 7 is a conceptual diagram of the symbol arrangement table. The symbol arrangement table associates the symbol position with the symbol type at the symbol position. Each symbol position (“00” to “20”) in the symbol arrangement table corresponds to each frame of each reel 12, and each symbol in the symbol arrangement table corresponds to each symbol drawn on the reel 12 shown in FIG. Correspond. The symbol position located in the middle line during rotation is stored in the symbol counter of the main RAM 303.

  FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram of the symbol code table. The symbol code table includes a symbol code that identifies each symbol of each reel 12. As understood from FIG. 7, each reel 12 has “Red Seven”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR”, “Replay x”, “Replay y”, “Bell”, “Star Bell”, “Plum”, “Watermelon”, and “Cherry”. 10 types of symbols are arranged. As shown in FIG. 8, each symbol code corresponds to each symbol. Specifically, “Red Seven” corresponds to symbol code 01 “00000001”, “Black BAR” corresponds to symbol code 02 “00000010”, and “White BAR” corresponds to symbol code 03 “ “00000011”, “Replay x” corresponds to “00000100” of symbol code 04, “Replay y” corresponds to “00000101” of symbol code 05, and “Bell” corresponds to “code“ 06 ”. “00000110”, “Star Bell” corresponds to symbol code “00000111” of symbol code 07, “Plum” corresponds to symbol code “00001000”, and “Watermelon” corresponds to symbol code. 09 corresponds to “00000101”, and “Cherry” corresponds to symbol code “00001010”. The symbol code is used, for example, in a priority order storage process described later.

  FIG. 9 is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. The main CPU 301 determines a winning area by using a winning area lottery table and a random value R1 in an internal lottery process to be described later. As shown in FIG. 9, each winning area lottery table includes a plurality of winning areas and lottery values corresponding to the winning areas. FIG. 9 shows the names of the winning areas. The winning area lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 for each set value (1 to 6). FIG. 9 illustrates a winning area lottery table that is referred to when the set value is “1”.

  Each winning area of the winning area lottery table designates each winning combination defined in the winning combination determining table shown in FIG. In FIG. 10, replay is simply abbreviated as “lip”. Similarly, in other figures, replay may be abbreviated as “lip”.

  For example, it is assumed that “batting order replay X1” of the winning area number “01” is determined by the internal lottery process. As shown in FIG. 10, the winning area number “01” designates the winning combination “normal replay” and the winning combination “RT2 transition replay”. That is, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X1” is won, a plurality of types of winning combinations are designated in duplicate. The combination of symbols of the winning combination designated in the winning area is permitted to stop on the active line.

  Each lottery value in the winning area lottery table is subtracted from the random value R1 in the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value corresponding to each winning area from the random value R1 in ascending order of the winning area (from “00” to “32”). In the internal lottery process, a winning area is determined in which the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R1 is a negative number. The probability of becoming a negative number when subtracted from the random number value R1 increases as the lottery value increases. Therefore, the winning area with the larger lottery value among the winning areas has a higher probability of winning.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the winning area lottery table includes lottery values for each RT state. Each RT state includes an RT0 state, an RT1 state, an RT2 state, and an RT3 state. Each RT state shifts when an RT transition symbol, which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the active line. The main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value corresponding to the RT state to the random value R1. Therefore, the probability that each winning area wins depends on the RT state.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning area lottery table includes each lottery value in the bonus operating state. The bonus operating state is entered when the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the bonus combination is won and the main line is not stopped and displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 shifts to an internal state in which the state where the bonus combination is won is maintained. As understood from FIG. 9, in the internal middle state, the bonus combination and batting order replay (X, Y) are not won. In each game in the bonus operating state, the “small role ALL” with the winning area number “30” is won.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the game where the winning area “small role ALL” has been won, the upper bells 1 to 8 and the middle bell (hereinafter referred to as “bell role”), the single role A and the single role B (hereinafter “chance”). "Corner"), horn cherry, middle cherries (hereinafter referred to as "cherry") and watermelon are permitted to stop on the active line. However, the symbol combination related to the bell role is prioritized and displayed on the active line over the symbol combination related to the chance role, cherry role and watermelon role.

  The prescribed number of betting medals in the bonus operating state is three, and the bonus operating state ends when 297 medals are paid out. When the bonus operating state ends, the main CPU 301 shifts to the RT0 state.

  As understood from FIG. 9, the lottery values of the winning area numbers “01” to “11” (hereinafter referred to as “re-game winning area”) are different for each RT state. Specifically, in the RT0 state, as shown in FIG. 9, the lottery value “8978” is allocated to the winning area of “normal replay” in the replay winning area, and the lottery values in the other replay winning areas are numerical values. “0”. That is, in the RT0 state, “normal replay” is won in the replay winning area.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the RT1 state, a lottery value “748” is assigned to each winning area of “batting order replays X1 to X6” in the replay winning area, and a lottery value “8” is assigned to the winning area of “BAR replay”. ”Is assigned, the lottery value“ 4490 ”is assigned to the winning area of“ normal replay ”, and the lottery values of other replay winning areas are the numerical value“ 0 ”. That is, in the RT1 state, “batting order replays X1 to X6”, “normal replay”, and “BAR replay” are selected in the replay winning area. In addition, the probability that any one of the re-game winning areas is determined is 8986 (748 × 6 + 8 + 4490) / 65536.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the RT2 state, a lottery value “7670” is assigned to each winning area of “batting order replay Y1 to Y3” in the replay winning area, and a lottery value “23010” is assigned to the winning area of “normal replay”. ”Is assigned, and the lottery value in the other re-game winning area is a numerical value“ 0 ”. That is, in the RT2 state, “batting order replays Y1 to Y3” and “normal replay” are selected in the replay winning area. In addition, the probability that any one of the re-game winning areas is determined is 46020 (7670 × 3 + 23010) / 65536.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the RT3 state, the lottery value “46020” is allocated to the “ordinary replay” winning area in the replay winning area, and the lottery values in the other replay winning areas are the numerical value “0”. . That is, in the RT3 state, “normal replay” is won in the replay winning area. The probability that any winning area of the replay winning areas is determined is 46020/65536.

  As understood from the above description, the winning probabilities of the RT2 state and RT3 state replay winning areas are higher than those of the RT0 state and RT1 state replaying winning areas. Further, as understood from FIG. 9, the lottery values of the winning area numbers “12” to “31” (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning area”) and the winning area number “32” are common in each RT state. That is, the winning probability in the winning winning area is equal in each RT state. Therefore, the RT2 state and the RT3 state are RT states that have a higher winning probability of winning combination and are advantageous to the player than the RT0 state and the RT1 state.

  FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram of the winning combination rule table. The winning combination defining table defines combinations of symbols that are permitted to stop on the active line in the game won by each winning combination. For example, in a game in which the winning combination “middle bell” is won, the combination of symbols “bell-bell-bell” is permitted to stop on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the winning combination defining table includes the permission bit number of each winning combination and the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination related to each winning combination is stopped on the active line. FIG. 11 shows the payout number when the symbol combination related to each winning combination is stopped on the active line in the game state where the specified number is three. When a plurality of winning combinations are won, the winning combination with a larger payout number is preferentially stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line in preference to other winning combinations, and the bonus combination has a lower priority than the other winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the winning role “middle bell” “upper bell 1-8” “watermelon role” “horn cherry” “middle cherry” “single piece A” “one piece B” (the winning winning area is won) When the symbol combination relating to the winning combination designated by the game) is displayed on the active line, the payout number of medals corresponding to each winning combination is awarded to the player. In the present embodiment, a winning combination in which medals are paid out when displayed on the active line is referred to as a “winning winning combination”. Also, “RT3 transition replay”, “RT2 transition replay”, “control replays 1 to 3”, “BAR replay”, and “normal replay” (the winning combination designated by the game in which the replay winning area is won) are displayed on the active line. Then, the next game is set to replay. In the present embodiment, the winning combination in which the next game becomes a re-game when displayed on the active line is collectively referred to as replay.

  Each permission bit number in the winning combination defining table designates each display permission bit in the display permission bit storage area of the main RAM 303. The display permission bit storage area is configured to include a plurality of display permission bits, and each display permission bit corresponds to each winning combination. For example, when the striking order bell L1 of the winning area number “12” wins and each symbol combination of the winning combination “middle bell”, “upper bell 1” and “upper bell 4” is permitted to stop on the active line Is assumed (see FIG. 10). In the above case, each display permission bit specified by the permission bit numbers “8”, “9”, and “12” in the display permission bit storage area is set to “1”, and the others are set to “0”.

  The main RAM 303 stores a display combination storage area to be compared with the display permission bit storage area in the display determination process described later. The display combination storage area includes a plurality of displayable bits, and each displayable bit corresponds to each winning combination (similar to the display permission bit storage area). In addition, each displayable bit is set to “1” when there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit stops on the effective line, and the symbol combination related to the corresponding winning combination is effective. Set to “0” when there is no possibility of stopping on the line. For example, at the time when each reel 12 starts rotating, all the displayable bits are set to “1” because there is a possibility that all symbol combinations related to the winning combination will stop on the effective line. Each displayable bit in the display combination storage area is updated every time each reel 12 stops, and corresponds to the symbol combination related to the winning combination that actually stopped at the active line when all the reels 12 stopped. Only the displayable bit is “1”.

  The winning combination won in the internal lottery process stops on the active line according to the operation mode of each stop button 25 of the player. Specifically, each winning combination stops on the active line according to the stop operation position of each stop button 25 and the order of the stop operation. For example, a symbol located within the range of 4 frames from the stop operation position (5 frames including the stop operation position) (hereinafter referred to as “retraction range”) can be stopped on the effective line, and a symbol positioned outside the retraction range is Even the symbols that make up the winning combination are not stopped on the active line (so-called “missing” occurs). As described above, a plurality of types of winning combinations may be won in a single game. In a game in which a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, for example, the symbol combination related to the winning combination corresponding to the order of the stop operation stops on the active line.

  12 and 13 are explanatory diagrams of a correspondence relationship between the winning area, the stop operation order, and the winning combination (a combination of symbols stopped on the active line) that stops on the active line.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a winning combination (replay) that stops at the active line in each stop operation order in a game where the re-game winning area is won. As shown in FIG. 12, when any of the winning areas “batting order replays X1 to X6” is won, “normal replay” or “RT2 transition replay” stops on the active line according to the mode of the stop operation. Specifically, in a game in which the winning area “batting order replay X1” is won, a stop operation sequence in which the reel 12L performs the first stop operation, the reel 12C performs the second stop operation, and the reel 12R performs the third stop operation (hereinafter simply “ In the case of the “left middle right” stop operation sequence), the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X1” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than “left middle right”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X2” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “left and right middle”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. The On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X2” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than “left and right middle”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X3” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle left and right”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X3” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than “middle left and right”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Similarly, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X4” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle right left”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay X4” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than “middle right left”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the game where the winning area “batting order replay X5” is won, if the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle right”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped on the active line and other than “middle right” When the stop operation is performed in order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the game where the winning area “batting order replay X6” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “right middle left”, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT2 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line, and “right middle left” When the stop operation is performed in a sequence other than the above, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when any of the winning areas “batting order replays Y1 to Y3” is won, the symbol combination related to “normal replay” or “RT3 transition replay” stops on the active line according to the mode of the stop operation. To do. Specifically, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay Y1” is won, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT3 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay Y1” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than the first left stop, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay Y2” is won, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT3 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay Y2” is won, when the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle first stop, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Similarly, in the game in which the winning area “batting order replay Y3” is won, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “RT3 transition replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “batting order replay Y3” is won, if the stop operation is performed in an order other than the first stop right, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when the BAR replay is won and the first stop is on the right, the symbol combination related to “BAR replay” or “normal replay” is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the game where the BAR replay is won, in the case of the first right stop operation, the “replay x” or “replay y” symbol of the right reel 12R, the “replay x” symbol of the middle reel 12C, When the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 12L is stopped at the timing when it is within the pull-in range, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “BAR replay” is stopped and displayed. For example, in a game in which BAR replay is won, a “cherry” symbol at symbol position “10” on the left reel 12L, a “replay x” symbol at symbol position “15” on the middle reel 12C, and a symbol position “on” on the right reel 12R. The symbol combination of “18” and “Replay x” symbols (see FIG. 4) can be stopped and displayed on the active line. When the above symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination of “white BAR−white BAR−white BAR” is stopped and displayed on the upper line. That is, in the game where BAR replay is won, the symbol combination of “white BAR-white BAR-white BAR” is stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation.

  On the other hand, in the game where the BAR replay is won and the right first stop operation is performed, and the reel 12R is not stopped at the timing when the “cherry” symbol is located within the pull-in range, the winning combination “ The symbol combination related to “normal replay” is stopped and displayed. Also, in the game where the BAR replay is won, when the first left stop operation or the middle first stop operation is performed, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation position. When the winning area “normal replay” is won, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “normal replay” is stopped and displayed in any stop operation order.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a winning combination that stops at the active line in each stop operation order in a game in which the winning area “batting order bell” (L1 to L4, C1 to C4, R1 to R4) is won. When the winning area “batting order bell” is determined, either the winning combination “middle stage bell” or the winning combination “upper bells 1 to 8” is designated as the winning combination (see FIG. 10). As understood from FIG. 13, in the game where the winning area “batting order bell” is won, depending on the stop operation order, one of the symbol combinations related to the winning combination “middle bell” or the winning combination “upper bell” becomes an active line. Stop. In the present embodiment, the stop operation sequence in which the winning combination is stopped and displayed is referred to as the correct answer pressing order of the winning combination. When the batting order bell L (1-4) is won, the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is the first stop on the left. Further, the correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell C (1-4) is won is the middle first stop, and the correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell R (1-4) is won, The first stop on the right. The hit order bell L, the hit order bell C, and the hit order bell R have the same win probability. Therefore, the left first stop, the middle first stop, and the right first stop are in the correct pressing order of the middle bells with the same probability.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game in which the winning area “batting order bell L1” is determined, in the case of the middle first stop operation, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” into the active line. The symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line at any stop operation position. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25L, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 1” or “upper bell 4” into the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game in which the winning area “batting order bell L2” is determined, in the case of the first left stop operation, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” into the active line. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25L, stop control is performed to draw the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 2” or “upper bell 3” into the active line. Similarly, in the game where the winning area “batting order bell L3” is won, in the case of the first left stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops on the active line, When a button other than the stop button 25L is operated first, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 5” or “upper bell 8” is stopped. In a game where the winning area “batting order bell L4” is won, in the case of the first stop operation on the left, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops on the active line and stops first. When a button other than the button 25L is operated, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 6” or “upper bell 7” is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game in which the winning area “batting order bell C1” is determined, in the case of the middle first stop operation, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” is stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25C, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 1” or “upper bell 6” stops. Further, in the game in which the winning area “batting order bell C2” is determined, in the case of the middle first stop operation, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops at the active line at any stop operation position. . On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25C, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 2” or “upper bell 5” stops. Similarly, in a game where the winning area “batting order bell C3” is won, in the case of the middle first stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops on the active line, When a button other than the stop button 25C is operated first, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 3” or “upper bell 8” is stopped. In the game where the winning area “batting order bell C4” is won, in the case of middle first stop operation, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops on the active line and stops first. When a button other than the button 25C is operated, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 4” or “upper bell 7” is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game in which the winning area “batting order bell R1” is determined, in the case of the first right stop operation, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” is stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25R, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 1” or “upper bell 7” stops. In the game in which the winning area “batting order bell R2” is determined, in the case of the first stop operation on the right, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” is stopped on the active line at any stop operation position. . On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed except for the stop button 25R, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 2” or “upper bell 8” stops. Similarly, in the game in which the winning area “batting order bell R3” is won, in the case of the first stop operation on the right, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops on the active line regardless of the stop operation position. When a button other than the stop button 25R is operated first, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 3” or “upper bell 5” is stopped. In the game where the winning area “batting order bell R4” is won, in the case of the first stop operation on the right, regardless of the stop operation position, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “middle bell” stops on the active line and stops first. When a button other than the button 25R is operated, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bell 4” or “upper bell 6” stops. However, the symbol combination related to the winning combination “upper bells 1 to 8” may be missed depending on the stop operation position.

  As understood from the above explanation, in the game where the winning area “batting order bell” is won, the symbol combination related to “middle bell” (the number of payouts is 9) is effective when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order. Stop on line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in a direction other than the correct answer pressing order, the losing eyes may stop at the active line. Therefore, when the game is played in the correct pressing order, it is advantageous for the player as compared to the case where the game is played out of the correct pressing order. As will be described in detail later, when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state, the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is notified.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a winning combination that stops at an active line at each stop operation position (stop operation timing) in a game won by each winning area. FIG. 14 shows the winning area and the winning combination (display winning combination) that can be stopped on the active line in the game in which the winning area has been won. Further, FIG. 14 shows a stop operation position for each reel 12 where each symbol constituting each winning combination can be stopped. That is, in FIG. 14, the drawing range of each symbol constituting each winning combination is shown for each reel 12. As described above, the stop operation position is a symbol position on the effective line (middle stage line) at the time when the stop operation is performed. The pull-in range is 4 frames from the stop operation position (5 frames including the stop operation position). Therefore, the drawing range of the symbol position “N” (N is an integer from the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “20”) of each reel 12 (L, C, R) is symbol positions “N-4” to “N”. N ".

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “Watermelon” is won, the watermelon role “Star Bell-Watermelon-Black BAR” is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, symbol positions “9” to “13” (retraction range of star bell symbol of symbol position “13”) or symbol positions “16” to “20” (retraction of star bell symbol of symbol position “20”) Range), the left reel 12L is stopped, the middle reel 12C is stopped at the symbol positions "9" to "13" (the watermelon symbol drawing range of symbol position "13"), and the symbol position "19" ”,“ 20 ”,“ 0 ”to“ 2 ”(drawing range of the black BAR symbol at symbol position“ 2 ”), when the right reel 12R is stopped, the watermelon role is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the reel 12 is operated to stop at a position other than the above-described stop operation position, the watermelon role is missed (losing eyes are stopped).

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “weak cherry” is won, the corner cherry “white BAR-replay x-bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the stop operation position. Specifically, when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “7” to “11” (the pulling range of the white BAR symbol at the symbol position “11”), the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the left reel 12L is stopped at positions other than the symbol positions “7” to “11”, the corner cherry is missed. The middle symbol of the corner cherry is a replay x symbol, and the right symbol is a bell symbol. All symbol positions (“0” to “20”) of the middle reel 12C are in any of the replay x symbols (replay x symbols of symbol positions “2”, “7”, “10”, “15”, or “20”). The drawing range is set, and all the symbol positions of the right reel 12R are the drawing range of any bell symbol (the bell symbols of symbol positions “4”, “7”, “12”, “15”, or “20”). That is, the symbols other than the corner cherry left reel 12L are stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “strong cherry” is won, the middle cherry “cherry-replay x-bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “6” to “10” (the cherry symbol drawing range of the symbol position “10”), the middle cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the left reel 12L is stopped at positions other than the symbol positions “6” to “10”, the middle cherries are missed. As with the square cherries, the middle symbol in the middle cherries is the replay x symbol, and the right symbol is the bell symbol. Accordingly, symbols other than the left reel 12L of the middle cherry are stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “weak chance eye” is won, the single-play A “Replay y-Red Seven-Watermelon” is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol positions “3” to “7” (replay y symbol pull-in range of symbol position “7”), and symbol positions “1” to “5” (symbols) The middle reel 12C is stopped at the position “5” of the red seven symbol drawing range) or the symbol positions “14” to “18” (the red seven symbol drawing range of the symbol position “18”), and the symbol position “ When the right reel 12R is operated to stop at 18 "to" 20 "," 0 "," 1 "(the watermelon symbol pull-in range of the symbol position" 1 "), the single player A is stopped and displayed on the active line. . On the other hand, when the reel 12 is stopped at a position other than the stop operation position described above, the one-piece combination A is missed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “strong chance eye” is won, the single-player combination “Replay y-Red Seven-Cherry” is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol positions “3” to “7” (replay y symbol pull-in range of symbol position “7”), and symbol positions “1” to “5” (symbols) The middle reel 12C is stopped at the position “5” of the red seven symbol drawing range) or the symbol positions “14” to “18” (the red seven symbol drawing range of the symbol position “18”), and the symbol position “ The right reel 12R is stopped at 5 ”to“ 9 ”(cherry symbol drawing range at symbol position“ 9 ”) or symbol positions“ 13 ”to“ 17 ”(cherry symbol drawing range at symbol position“ 17 ”). In such a case, a single combination B is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the reel 12 is stopped at a position other than the stop operation position described above, the one-piece combination B is missed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “single bonus” is won, the bonus combination “red seven-red seven-red seven” is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the stop operation position. Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at symbol positions “1” to “5” (the drawing range of the red seven symbol at symbol position “5”), and symbol positions “1” to “5” The middle reel 12C is stopped at the position “5” of the red seven symbol drawing range) or the symbol positions “14” to “18” (the red seven symbol drawing range of the symbol position “18”), and the symbol position “ When the right reel 12R is stopped in the range of “6” to “10” (the red seven symbol pull-in range of the symbol position “10”), the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the reel 12 is stopped at a position other than the stop operation position described above, the bonus combination is missed. However, if a bonus combination is missed in the current game, the bonus combination won (internal state) is maintained until the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in subsequent games.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “duplicate bonus” is won, the bonus combination or watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the stop operation position. Specifically, in the game where the winning area “duplicate bonus” is won, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “1” to “5” and the symbol positions “1” to “5” or the symbol position “ When the middle reel 12C is stopped at 14 ”to“ 18 ”and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions“ 6 ”to“ 10 ”, the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the game where the winning area “duplicate bonus” is won, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “9” to “13” or the symbol positions “16” to “20”, and the symbol positions “9” to “9” When the middle reel 12C is stopped at “13” and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions “19”, “20”, “0” to “2”, the watermelon role is stopped and displayed on the active line. Is done. If the reel 12 is stopped at a position other than the stop operation position where the bonus combination or the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game in which the duplicate bonus is won, the bonus combination and the watermelon combination are missed. However, if a bonus combination is missed in the current game, the bonus combination won (internal state) is maintained until the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in subsequent games.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “common bell” is won, the middle bell “bell (star bell) -bell-bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line. All symbol positions on the left reel 12L are either bell symbols or star bell symbols (design symbol positions "3", "8" or "17" bell symbols, symbol position "13" or "20" star bell symbols). It becomes the pull-in range. In addition, all symbol positions of the middle reel 12C are in the drawing range of any bell symbol (bell symbols of symbol positions “1”, “4”, “9”, “12”, or “17”), and all of the right reels 12R. The symbol position is a pull-in range of any bell symbol (bell symbols of symbol positions “4”, “7”, “12”, “15”, or “20”). That is, in the game where the winning area “common bell” is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position of each reel 12.

  As understood from the above description, the winning combination may be missed depending on the stop operation position. If you miss the winning role, the winning rate will decrease, which will be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the above gaming machines, the player plays a game in a stop operation mode (so-called small role collection batting method, DDT batting method, KKK batting method, etc.) that maximizes the payout rate.

  In the present embodiment, the stop operation mode in which the payout rate is maximized is referred to as a “specific operation mode”. However, as will be described in detail later, in each game, information advantageous for stopping and displaying the winning combination (instruction information, instruction effect, navigation effect described later) may be notified. The specific operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the payout rate becomes maximum in each game in which information advantageous for stopping and displaying the winning combination is not notified.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the specific operation mode. In the specific operation mode of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation position of the left reel 12L is the symbol position “9” or symbol position “10”, and the stop operation position of the middle reel 12C is the symbol position “9” to “9”. “13” is a stop operation mode in which the stop operation position of the right reel 12R is the symbol positions “19” “20” “0” to “2”. FIG. 15 shows the winning combination that is stopped and displayed for each winning area when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode.

  The stop operation position (symbol positions “9” and “10”) of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is located in the drawing pattern range (symbol positions “9” to “13”) of the watermelon role (see FIG. 14). . Further, the stop operation position (symbol positions “9” to “13”) of the middle reel 12C in the specific operation mode matches the middle symbol pull-in range (symbol positions “9” to “13”) serving as a watermelon. The stop operation position (symbol positions “19”, “20”, “0” to “2”) of the right reel 12R in the operation mode is a drawing range of the middle symbols serving as a watermelon (symbol positions “19”, “20”, “0” to “0”). “2”). Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game where the winning area “watermelon” is won.

  The stop operation position (symbol positions “9” and “10”) of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is located in the drawing pattern range (symbol positions “7” to “11”) of the left cherry (see FIG. 14). . As described above, the middle symbol (replay x) and the right symbol (bell) of the corner cherry can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game where the weak cherry is won. Further, the stop operation position of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is located in the drawing range (symbol positions “6” to “10”) of the left symbol of the middle stage cherry. As described above, the middle symbol (replay x) and the right symbol (bell) of the middle stage cherry can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, the middle cherries are stopped and displayed on the active line in the game where the strong cherries are won.

  The stop operation position (symbol positions “9” and “10”) of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is not located in the drawing range (symbol positions “3” to “7”) of the left symbol of the single piece A (FIG. 14). reference). Further, the stop operation position (symbol positions “9” to “13”) of the middle reel 12C in the specific operation mode is the drawing range (symbol positions “1” to “5”, “14”) of the middle symbol of the single-piece role A. To “18”), and the stop operation position (symbol position “9” to “13”) of the right reel 12R in the specific operation mode is the drawing range (symbol position “18”) of the right symbol of the single A ~ "20" "0" "1"). If each symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) constituting the winning combination is not stopped within the pull-in range, the winning combination is missed. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the weak chance is won, one game A is missed and the losing eye is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  The stop operation position of the left reel 12L in the specific operation mode is not located in the left symbol pull-in range (symbol positions “3” to “7”) of the one-piece combination B (see FIG. 14). Further, the stop operation position of the middle reel 12C in the specific operation mode is not located in the middle symbol pull-in range (symbol positions “1” to “5”, “14” to “18”) of the single player B, and is specified. The stop operation position of the right reel 12R in the operation mode is not located in the middle symbol pull-in range (symbol positions “5” to “9”, “13” to “17”) of the single piece B. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, in the game in which the strong chance is won, one game B is missed and the losing eye is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  The stop operation position of the left reel 12L of the specific operation mode is not located in the left symbol drawing range (symbol positions “1” to “5”) of the bonus combination (see FIG. 14). Further, the stop operation position of the middle reel 12C in the specific operation mode is not located in the middle symbol drawing range (symbol positions “1” to “5”, “14” to “18”) of the bonus combination, and the specific operation mode. The stop operation position of the right reel 12R is not located in the drawing range of the right symbol of the bonus combination (symbol positions “6” to “10”). Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, in the game where the single bonus is won, the bonus combination is missed and the losing eye is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, in a game in which a duplicate bonus is won, the bonus combination is missed while the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In the game where the common bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation mode. In FIG. 15, the winning combination that is stopped when the batting order bell is won is omitted. As described above, each stop operation order (left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop) is the correct push order of the middle bells with the same probability (1/3 of the hitting bell win). In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the batting order bell is won and the stop operation is performed in the pushing order, the upper bell is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/4 in any stop operation mode. . Therefore, when the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is not notified, the expected value of the acquired medals in the game won by the hitting bell is equal in all stop operation modes. That is, the expected value of the acquired medal in the game where the batting order bell is won is equal in the specific operation mode and the other stop operation modes.

  As described above, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, each winning combination including a watermelon combination, a corner cherry, and a middle cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in each game, each winning combination including the single combination A and the single combination B is missed. In other words, when the stop operation is performed in the operation mode in which the one-piece combination A or the one-piece combination B is stopped and displayed on the active line, the watermelon combination, the corner cherry, and the middle cherry are missed. For example, the probability “819/65536” (see FIG. 9) that the horn cherry (weak cherry) wins is the probability “243/65536” that the single player A wins and the probability “100/65536 that the single player B wins. "And higher than" 343/65536 ". Further, the payout number “2” of the corner cherry is larger than the payout number “1” of the single combination A and the single combination B. As understood from the above description, in each game in which information that is advantageous for stopping and displaying the winning combination is not notified, the expected value of the winning medal (running rate) when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode is the specific operation It becomes larger than the expected value of the acquired medal when the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the mode (for example, the stop operation mode in which the single winning combination A stops). In a normal state to be described later, the player usually performs a stop operation in a specific operation mode.

  As described above, the RT state includes the RT0 state to the RT3 state. In addition, the RT state shifts when the RT transition symbol is displayed on the active line. Specifically, when the RT1 transition symbol is displayed on the active line, the state shifts to the RT1 state. Similarly, when the RT2 transition symbol is displayed on the effective line, the state shifts to the RT2 state, and when the RT3 transition symbol is displayed, the state shifts to the RT3 state.

  FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram of the RT transition symbol definition table. As understood from FIGS. 16 and 11, the RT3 transition symbol is a combination of symbols of RT3 transition replay. That is, when the symbol combination related to the RT3 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the right to replay is granted and the state transitions to the RT3 state. Similarly, when the symbol combination related to RT2 transition replay is stopped and displayed, the right to replay is granted and the state transitions to the RT2 state.

  The RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed when a winning combination (middle bell, upper bell) is missed in a game won by the winning area “batting order bell”. That is, when the stop operation is performed in a sequence other than the correct pressing order of the batting order bells and the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the selected upper bell cannot be withdrawn, the RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line. The RT1 transition symbol is not a symbol combination related to the winning combination.

  As will be described in detail later, when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state, a stop operation order in which the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed is notified. Further, when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state, the correct combination pressing order of the striking order bell is notified so that the symbol combination related to the middle bell can be stopped and the RT1 transition symbol is prevented from being stopped.

  The main CPU 301 controls the instruction display 16 according to each state including the AT state and the normal state. In the present embodiment, the AT state and the normal state may be collectively referred to as an instruction state. An instruction state flag indicating the current instruction state is stored in the main RAM 303.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the instruction state. As shown in FIG. 17, the instruction state shifts at a specific opportunity. For example, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the AT state is appropriate in each game by an AT determination process. When the AT state is won, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state from the normal state to the AT state. Specifically, in a game in which a watermelon, weak cherry, weak chance (weak rare role) or strong cherry, strong chance (strong rare role) is won, the AT state is won with a predetermined probability. When the AT state is won in the game in the normal state, the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag from the normal state to the AT state (start preparation state) and sets an initial value “50” in the AT counter indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state. Is stored. The AT counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example.

  In each game in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the stop operation order. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing a stop operation sequence advantageous to the player in the AT state. On the other hand, in the normal state, a stop operation order that is advantageous to the player is not instructed. Therefore, the AT state is an instruction state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the AT state includes a start preparation state, an AT in-progress state, an end preparation state, and a bonus notification state. Although details will be described later, the instruction information that can be displayed on the instruction display 16 may be different for each instruction state.

  When the AT state is won in the normal state, the main CPU 301 shifts to the start preparation state. In the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the correct answer pressing order of the RT2 transition replay. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed in the start preparation state, the RT2 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. In the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information instructing the correct pressing order of the middle bell. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed in the start preparation state, the RT1 transition symbol is not stopped and displayed on the active line (the middle bell is not missed), so the RT2 state does not shift (fall). Further, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay in the start preparation state after transitioning to the RT2 state. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed in the start preparation state, the RT3 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the RT state transitions to the RT3 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, the main CPU 301 shifts from the start preparation state to the AT state. Note that the AT counter indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state is not subtracted in the start preparation state.

  In the AT state, the main CPU 301 indicates the instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the middle bell, the instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay, and the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay in the start preparation state. The instruction display 16 displays the instruction information to be displayed. Further, the main CPU 301 subtracts a numerical value “1” from the AT counter in each game in the AT state. When the AT counter is decremented to the numerical value “0”, the main CPU 301 shifts from the AT state to the end preparation state. The AT state is in principle the RT3 state. Therefore, since the batting order replay X and the batting order replay Y are not won (see FIG. 9), the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay and the RT3 transition replay is not normally instructed. However, in the game where the hitting order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed outside the specified order (when an operation error is made), the RT1 transition symbol may stop and the RT3 state may transition to the RT1 state. Even in the above case, since the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay and the RT3 transition replay is instructed in the AT state, it is possible to return from the RT1 state to the RT3 state by following the instruction of the instruction information.

  The main CPU 301 executes AT determination processing in the AT state and the start preparation state, as in the normal state. When the AT state is won in the AT state and the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 adds an AT stock counter (adds the number of sets). When the AT counter indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state is subtracted to a numerical value “0” and the AT stock counter is larger than the numerical value “0”, the main CPU 301 sets the initial value “50” to the AT counter again. Set and continue the AT state. In the AT state, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to add an AT counter (addition of the remaining number of games).

  As described above, when the batting order bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information indicating the correct pressing order of the middle bell is displayed on the instruction display 16. On the other hand, in the final preparation state, when the batting order bell is won, the stop operation is performed in either the correct answer push order of the middle bell and one stop operation order other than the correct answer push order (hereinafter referred to as “lose push order”). Instruction information for instructing to be displayed is displayed on the instruction display 16. For example, it is assumed that the batting order bell L (the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is the first stop on the left) is won in the end preparation state. In the above case, the instruction information indicating that stop display should be performed in any order of the first left stop (the correct answer pressing order) and the middle first stop (the lost pressing order), or the left first stop and the right first stop Instruction information for instructing that the stop operation should be performed in any order of 1 stop (lose push order) is displayed on the instruction display 16. In addition, when the batting order bell C (the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is the middle first stop) is won in the end preparation state, either the first left stop (missing pressing order) or the middle first stop (correct answer pressing order) The above-described instruction information instructing that stop display should be performed in that order, or instruction information instructing that the stop operation should be performed in any order of the middle first stop and the right first stop (losing push order) Is displayed on the instruction display 16. Further, when the batting order bell R (the right answer push order of the middle bell is the first stop on the right) is won in the end preparation state, either the first left stop (the lost push order) or the first right stop (the correct answer push order) The above-described instruction information instructing that the stop operation should be performed in that order, or the above-described instruction instructing that the stop operation should be performed in any order of the middle first stop (loss push order) and the right first stop The instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  With the above configuration, in the end preparation state, both the correct answer pressing order and the missed pressing order of the middle bell are indicated by the instruction information, and the correct answer pressing order cannot be specified. Therefore, even when the instruction information is displayed, the player may perform a stop operation in the order of losing. When the stop operation is performed in the pushing order, the batting order bell (middle bell, upper bell) can be missed. When the batting order bell is missed, the RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line as described above, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT1 state in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state to the normal state. If the RT state at the time of transition to the end preparation state is the RT1 state, the main CPU 301 immediately transitions to the normal state.

  The main CPU 301 determines each winning area including the bonus combination by lottery in each game in each instruction state. In addition, when the bonus combination is won, that is, when the main CPU 301 shifts to the internal middle state, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value in the shift counter. The transition counter is provided to shift the instruction state, and a numerical value “1” is subtracted for each game. When the shift counter is decremented to a numerical value “0”, the instruction state shifts to the bonus notification state. The transition counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. Further, the initial value of the transition counter of the present embodiment is a numerical value “3”. In the above configuration, the transition counter is decremented to a numerical value “0” in three games from the game in which the bonus combination is won, and the instruction state shifts to the bonus notification state.

  As described above, the internal middle state is more disadvantageous to the player than other game states (for example, the RT0 state) in that the bonus combination is not won. Therefore, the smaller the number of games played until the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line after the transition to the internal middle state, the more advantageous for the player. However, for example, a player (beginner), who is not good at pushing, may need a lot of games before the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured to notify the correct pressing order of the middle bells in the bonus notification state (internal middle state).

  As will be described in detail later, a continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 30 for three games after the bonus combination is won. Further, when the continuous effect is finished, the notice effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The continuous performance informs that it is a chance to win a bonus combination. In addition, the announcement effect notifies the winning of the bonus combination. Assume a configuration in which a transition counter is not provided. In the above configuration, when the bonus combination is won, the normal state is immediately shifted to the bonus notification state. Therefore, in the game in which the continuous effect is executed, the instruction information may be displayed on the instruction display 16 and the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell may be instructed. Since the instruction information is not displayed in the normal state, when the instruction information is displayed, the player may recognize that the player has transitioned to the bonus notification state even during the continuous production. That is, there is a case where the winning of the bonus combination is substantially notified before the announcement effect is executed. In the above case, the interest of continuous production is reduced. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, by providing a transition counter, in the game from the winning of the bonus combination until the end of the continuous performance, the normal state is maintained and the instruction information is not displayed. did. According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the interest of the continuous performance is reduced while notifying the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the middle state.

  When the bonus operating state starts, the bonus notification state ends. Further, when the bonus operating state is ended, the state shifts (returns) to the instruction state in the game in which the bonus combination is won. For example, when a bonus combination is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the normal state after the bonus operation state ends. When the bonus combination is won in the AT state, the state shifts to the AT state (start preparation state) after the bonus operation state ends.

  18 and 19 are conceptual diagrams of each instruction determination table (A, B, C). In each game, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number from the instruction determination table, and displays instruction information (“1” to “12”) corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction display 16. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a command (second command described later) indicating an instruction number determined in each game to the sub control board 400 (sub CPU 412). 18 and 19 show a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 that displays the instruction information, and the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information. As described above, the instruction display 16 of this embodiment is a 2-digit 7-segment display. In FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the segment which light-emits among each segment of each 7-segment display is shown by shading.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, each instruction determination table is configured to include each instruction number for each winning area. Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table A (FIG. 18A), an instruction determination table B (FIG. 18B), and an instruction determination table C (FIG. 19). The instruction determination table A is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the normal state. The instruction determination table B is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the start preparation state and in-AT state, and the instruction determination table C is used to determine the instruction number of each game in the end preparation state. It is done. The instruction determination table B is also used in the bonus notification state.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the instruction number “99” is determined regardless of which winning area is won in the normal state. When the instruction number “99” is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display the instruction information. Specifically, when the instruction number “99” is determined, the instruction display 16 is turned off during the period for displaying the instruction information. According to the above configuration, the stop operation mode is not instructed on the instruction display 16 in the normal state. However, as will be described in detail later, the liquid crystal display device 30 may instruct a stop operation mode even in the normal state. For example, when the BAR replay is won in the normal state, the liquid crystal display device 30 performs an instruction effect instructing the correct answer pressing order of the BAR replay.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the batting order replay X1 is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “01”. When the instruction number “01” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display a number “1” (hereinafter referred to as “instruction information“ 1 ””) as instruction information. Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the batting order replay X2 is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “02”. When the instruction number “02” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “2”. When the batting order replay X3 is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “03” and causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “3”. When the batting order replay X4 is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “04” and causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “4”. When the batting order replay X5 is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “05” and causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “5”. When the batting order replay X6 is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “06” and causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “6”.

  In the above configuration, when the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay X1 has been won in the current game. Accordingly, when the instruction information “1” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in the correct pressing order “left middle right” (see FIG. 12) of the RT2 transition replay when the batting order replay X1 is won. In other words, when the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that the stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed. Further, when the instruction information “2” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay X2 has been won in the current game, and therefore the transition to RT2 when the batting order replay X2 is won. Stop operation in the right / left middle order of replay. In other words, when the instruction information “2” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that the stop operation order “left / right middle” is instructed. Similarly, when the instruction information “3” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the stop operation order “middle left and right” is instructed, and when the instruction information “4” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the stop operation order “ When “middle right and left” is instructed and the instruction information “5” is displayed on the instruction display 16, when the stop operation order “right and left middle” is instructed and the instruction information “6” is displayed on the instruction display 16, The stop operation order “right middle left” is instructed. In the above configuration, it can be said that the instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the batting order replay Y1 or the batting order bell L (1-4) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “07”. To do. When the instruction number “07” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “7”. Further, in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, when the batting order replay Y2 or the batting order bell C (1 to 4) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “08”. When the instruction number “08” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “8”. Further, in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, when the batting order replay Y3 or the batting order bell R (1 to 4) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “09”. When the instruction number “09” is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “9”.

  In the above configuration, when the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay Y1 or the batting order bell L is won in the current game. As described above, the correct push order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y1 is won and the correct push order of the middle bell when the batting order bell L is won are the first left stop (FIG. 12 and FIG. 13). Therefore, when the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the first left stop in order to stop and display the middle bell or the RT3 transition replay on the active line. In other words, when the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that the first left stop is instructed. When the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay Y2 or the batting order bell C has been won in the current game. As described above, the correct push order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y2 is won and the correct push order of the middle bell when the batting order bell C is won are the middle first stop. Therefore, when the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the middle first stop. In other words, when the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that the middle first stop is instructed. Further, when the instruction information “9” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player can recognize that the batting order replay Y3 or the batting order bell R has been won in the current game. As described above, the correct push order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y3 is won and the correct push order of the middle bell when the batting order bell R is won are the first right stop. Therefore, when the instruction information “9” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the first right stop. That is, it is also said that when the instruction information “9” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the first right stop is instructed. In the above configuration, it can be said that the instruction information corresponding to the correct answer pressing order of the RT3 transition replay and the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is displayed on the instruction display 16. In the start preparation state or in the AT state, when a player other than the batting order replay or batting order bell wins, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “99” and the instruction display 16 does not display the instruction information.

  For example, as a comparative example, a configuration is assumed in which separate instruction information is displayed for each winning area (winning area number) having the same correct pressing order. In the above comparison, the instruction information for instructing the correct answer pressing order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y1 is won, the instruction information for instructing the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell L1 is won, and the batting order Instruction information for instructing the correct answer order of the middle bell when the bell L2 is won, Instruction information for instructing the correct answer order of the middle bell when the hit order bell L3 is won, and the middle stage when the hit order bell L4 is won It is necessary to separately provide instruction information for instructing the correct pressing order of the bells. That is, it is necessary to provide five types of instruction information for instructing the left first stop in the comparison. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, common instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16 for each winning area having the same correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, only one type of instruction information for instructing the first left stop is sufficient. According to the above configuration, the number of types of instruction information is reduced as compared with the above-described proportionality.

  FIG. 19 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table C used when determining an instruction number in each game in the end preparation state. As shown in FIG. 19, in the end preparation state, when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won, the main CPU 301 determines one of the instruction numbers “10” to “12”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10” with a probability of about 1/2 and the instruction number with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell L (1 to 4) is won in the end preparation state. “11” is determined. When the batting order bell C (1-4) is won in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10” with a probability of about 1/2, and the instruction number “12” with a probability of about 1/2. To decide. When the batting order bell R (1-4) is won in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “11” with a probability of about ½ and the instruction number “12” with a probability of about ½. To decide.

  When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “10” on the instruction display 16. When the instruction number “11” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “11” on the instruction display 16, and when the instruction number “12” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “12” on the instruction display 16. To display.

  In the above configuration, when the instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the batting order bell L or the batting order bell C is won with a probability of about 1/2. As described above, the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell L is won is the first left stop, and the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell when the hitting bell C is won is the middle first stop. In the above configuration, in the game in which the instruction information “10” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation at the left first stop or the middle first stop. In other words, when instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that the stop operation is instructed at the first left stop or the first middle stop. When the instruction information “11” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the batting order bell L or the batting order bell R is won with a probability of about 1/2. As described above, the correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell R is won is the first stop on the right. In the above configuration, in the game in which the instruction information “11” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation at the first left stop or the first right stop. That is, when instruction information “11” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the first right stop. Further, when the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the batting order bell C or the batting order bell R is won with a probability of about 1/2. In the above configuration, in the game in which the instruction information “12” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation at the middle first stop or the right first stop. In other words, when the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16, it is also said that the stop operation is instructed at the middle first stop or the right first stop.

  As described above, when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won in the end preparation state, a plurality of types of stop operation orders are instructed. In addition, one of the instructed stop operation sequences is the correct push order of the middle bells, and the other is the lose push order. For example, it is assumed that the instruction information “10” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell L is won. In the above case, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the first middle stop, the first left stop is the correct push order of the middle bell, and the first middle stop is the lose push order. On the other hand, when instruction information “11” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell L is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the first right stop, and the first left stop is the correct answer of the middle bell. The order is the pushing order, and the right first stop is the losing pushing order. Further, it is assumed that the instruction information “10” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell C is won. In the above case, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed in the first left stop or the first middle stop, the first middle stop is the correct push order of the middle bell, and the first left stop is the lose push order. On the other hand, when the instruction information “12” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell C is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the middle first stop or the right first stop, and the middle first stop is the correct answer of the middle bell. The order is the pushing order, and the right first stop is the losing pushing order. In addition, when the instruction information “11” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell R is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the first right stop, and the right first stop is the correct answer of the middle bell. The order is the pushing order, and the first left stop is the losing pushing order. On the other hand, when instruction information “12” is displayed in the game in which the batting order bell R is won, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the middle first stop or the right first stop, and the right first stop is the correct answer of the middle bell. It is a pushing order, and the middle first stop is a lost pushing order.

  As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the game in which the hitting bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the game in which the batting order bell has been won in the order in which the hit order is lost, the RT state may shift from the RT3 state to the RT1 state. When transitioning to the RT1 state, the instruction state transitions from the AT state (end preparation state) to the normal state. That is, in the game in which the batting order bell is won in the ready state for completion, the correct push order and the losing push order of the middle bell are instructed, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, the AT state is maintained and the stop is made in the lose push order If operated, the AT state may end. In the above configuration, the player can maintain the AT state by continuously applying the correct pushing order of the batting order bell. Therefore, for example, the fun of the game can be improved as compared to the configuration in which the normal state is immediately shifted to when the AT state ends. As will be described in detail later, when the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state, the pushing order effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 30. As shown in FIG. 19, when a winning area other than the batting order bell is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “99” and does not display the instruction information.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the instruction information “1” to “12” instructing the stop operation mode is displayed by the instruction display 16 controlled by the main CPU 301. Temporarily, in a configuration in which only a device controlled by the sub CPU 412 (for example, the stop operation order display lamp 29) notifies the stop operation mode, when the sub CPU 412 has a malfunction, the stop operation mode is not notified. Inconvenience may occur. In the present embodiment, since the instruction display 16 controlled by the main CPU 301 displays instruction information, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed.

  FIG. 20 is a timing chart for explaining the instruction information displayed at each time of the game. FIG. 20 shows a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 at each time point (a game start time point, a stop operation time point, a time point when the winning combination is stopped) in one game.

  FIG. 20A is a specific example when the batting order bell L (1-4) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when a game start operation (operation of the start lever 24) is performed in the AT state or the start preparation state, immediately after that, the correct pressing order of the middle bell (left first stop) The instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16. In the specific example of FIG. 20A, it is assumed that the batting order bell L is won and a stop operation is performed at the designated first left stop. In the above case, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, the instruction display 16 continuously displays the instruction information “7” until the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, a period from when the game start operation is performed until the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed is referred to as an instruction display period TS.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line, the instruction display 16 displays the payout number “9” of the middle bell instead of the instruction information. Specifically, when the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 first causes the instruction display 16 to display the number “0”. Thereafter, the main CPU 301 adds the numerical value of the indication display 16 by the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “9” indicating the payout number of the middle bell and displays it (0 → 1... 8 → 9). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20A, a period during which the instruction display 16 displays the number of payouts is referred to as a payout display period TH. The payout display period TH ends, for example, when a bet medal for the next game is inserted.

  Temporarily, in the configuration in which the instruction display period TS and the payout display period TH are continuous, the payout number is displayed immediately after the payout display period TH is started (without displaying the number “0” or the like) (hereinafter, “ It is called “proportional”. In the above comparison, for example, when the middle bell (the number of payouts is 9) stops on the active line, the number “9” is immediately displayed without displaying the numbers “0” to “8”. . When the batting order bell R is won, the number “9” as the instruction information is displayed in the instruction display period TS, and the number “9” as the number of payouts is displayed in the subsequent payout display period TH. That is, in the comparative example, the number “9” is continuously displayed over the instruction display period TS and the payout display period TH. Therefore, since the display of the instruction display 16 does not change at the start of the payout display period TH (end of the instruction display period TS), it is difficult for some players to recognize the start of the payout display period TH. It may be difficult to determine whether the number is instruction information or the number of payouts. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, when the payout display period TH is started, the instruction display 16 first displays the number “0”, and then reaches the number “9” indicating the number of payouts. It was set as the structure which adds and displays sequentially (a numerical display is variably displayed). In the above configuration, when the payout display period TH is started, the number on the instruction display 16 is displayed in a variable manner, so that the start of the payout display period TH is more easily recognized as compared with the above-described proportionality. Therefore, the inconvenience described above is suppressed. However, the present invention does not exclude the above-described comparison. In other words, when the winning combination stops on the active line, the payout number of the winning combination may be displayed immediately.

  In the configuration in which the instruction display 16 displays both the instruction information and the payout number, the configuration for preventing confusion between the instruction information and the payout number is not limited to the above example. For example, when displaying the number of payouts in a game displaying instruction information, the main CPU 301 may temporarily hide the instruction display 16 immediately before starting to display the payout number, and then display the payout number. Good. As a specific aspect of the above configuration, the instruction information is displayed from the game start operation to immediately before the third stop operation. In addition, a period (a period during which the reel 12 rotates (slides) the pull-in range) and a period for the determination process from the time of the third stop operation to when the medal payout (addition of credits, driving of the hopper 520) is started are included. ), The instruction display 16 is hidden, and then the payout number is displayed. According to the above configuration, since the non-display period is interposed between the period in which the instruction information is displayed and the period in which the payout number is displayed, confusion between the instruction information and the payout number is suppressed. In the above configuration, the payout number may be added and displayed from the numerical value “0” (similar to FIG. 20A), or the numerical value as the payout number (for example, the numerical value “9” for the middle bell). May be displayed immediately. Further, the period during which the instruction display 16 is not displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, the indication indicator 16 may be hidden during a period until a predetermined time length (for example, about 0.5 seconds) elapses from the time point of the third stop operation.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the game in which the batting order bell C (the middle first stop is the correct pushing order) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information “8” (the middle first stop) immediately after the game starts. Is displayed on the instruction display 16, and then, when the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number “9” which is the number of payout of the middle bell is displayed on the instruction display 16. Is done. Also, in the game in which the batting order bell R (right first stop is the correct answer pressing order) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction information “9” (instructing the right first stop) is instructed immediately after the game starts. When it is displayed on the display 16 and then the first right stop operation is performed and the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number “9”, which is the number of payouts of the middle bell, is displayed.

  In addition, in the AT state or the start preparation state, when the batting order replay Y1 (the first stop on the left is the correct pressing order) is won, the instruction information “7” is immediately after the start of the game, as in the case where the batting order bell L is won. Is displayed. Similarly, when the batting order replay Y2 (the middle first stop is the correct answer pressing order) is won, as in the case where the batting order bell C is won, the instruction information “8” (middle first stop is designated) immediately after the game starts. Is displayed and when the batting order replay Y3 (right first stop is the correct pressing order) is won, the instruction information “9” (right first stop is instructed immediately after the game is started, as in the case where the batting order bell R is won. ) Is displayed. However, when the replay is stopped and displayed, the medals are not paid out, so the payout number is not displayed.

  FIG. 20B is a specific example when the batting order bell L is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. However, in the specific example of FIG. 20 (a), it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (left first stop) of the middle bell, whereas in the specific example of FIG. It is assumed that the stop operation is performed in order (middle first stop, right first stop).

  As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the instruction information “7” is displayed and the first stop operation is performed in the middle-bell disengagement order, immediately after that, the instruction information “7” is displayed. Instead, the operation error information “-” is displayed on the instruction display 16. The operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 when a stop operation is performed outside the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information (when an operation error is made) in the instruction display period TS. For example, the operation error information is continuously displayed on the instruction display 16 until the instruction display period TS ends. Note that the period during which the operation error information is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, the operation error information may be displayed on the instruction display 16 for a predetermined time after an operation error is made.

  When the stop operation is performed in the order of losing the middle bell, as shown in FIG. 20B, the upper and middle bells may be missed and the losing eye may be stopped and displayed on the active line. When the losing eye is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number “0” is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the payout display period TH. When the number of payouts is 0 (for example, when the losing eye is stopped and displayed on the active line), the instruction display 16 may be hidden after the game ends.

  On the other hand, even when an operation error is made and operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16, the upper bell may be stopped and displayed on the active line. In the above case, when the upper bell is stopped and displayed on the active line, the instruction display 16 displays the payout number “9” of the upper bell in place of the operation error information “-”. Specifically, the operation error information “-” is switched to the numerical value “0”, and then the numerical value of the instruction display 16 is added and displayed from the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “9”. The display may be immediately switched from the operation error information “-” to the payout number “9” of the upper bell.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the game in which the batting order bell C or the batting order bell R is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, when the first stop operation is performed in the middle-bell dismissal order, the above-described FIG. As in the specific example, the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 immediately after the first stop operation. In addition, when the batting order replay Y1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, operation mistake information is displayed on the instruction display 16 when a non-first left stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the batting order replay Y2 is won, operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 when a non-first stop operation is performed, and when the batting order replay Y3 is won, an operation other than the right first stop operation is performed. The operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  FIG. 20C is a specific example when the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the AT state, immediately after the batting order replay X1 is won, the instruction information “1” indicating the correct answer pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay is displayed on the instruction display 16. Is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 20C, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the stop operation sequence “left middle right” instructed by the instruction information. In the above case, the main CPU 301 continuously displays the instruction information “1” on the instruction display 16 in the instruction display period TS, and when the RT2 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the display of the instruction information is ended. Let

  Although illustration is omitted, in the AT state or the start preparation state, when any of the batting order replay X2 to the batting order replay X6 is won, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is instructed in the same manner as when the batting order replay X1 is won. The instruction information to be displayed is displayed on the instruction display 16. Further, when any one of the batting order replay X2 to the batting order replay X6 is won, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order of the RT2 transition replay, in the instruction display period TS, as in the case where the batting order replay X1 is won. The instruction information is continuously displayed on the instruction display 16.

  FIG. 20D is a specific example when the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 20C. However, in the specific example of FIG. 20C, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay, whereas in the specific example of FIG. Assume that stop operations are performed in order. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 20D, it is assumed that the first stop operation is performed in an order other than the first left stop (first middle stop, first right stop). As shown in FIG. 20D, when the batting order replay X1 is won, the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Thereafter, when the first stop operation is performed in an order other than the left first stop, immediately after the first stop operation, the main CPU 301 displays operation error information “-” instead of the instruction information “1” on the instruction display 16. To display. The operation error information is continuously displayed on the instruction display 16 until the instruction display period TS ends.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the AT state or the start preparation state, when the batting order replay X2 is won and the batting order replay X6 is won, and the first stop operation is performed in the order of losing the RT2 transition replay, FIG. As in the specific example of d), the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 immediately after the first stop operation.

  FIG. 20 (e) is a specific example when the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, similarly to FIG. 20 (c) and FIG. 20 (d). Further, FIG. 20 (e) assumes a case where the stop operation is performed in other than the correct answer pressing order of the RT2 transition replay as in FIG. 20 (d). However, FIG. 20D is a specific example when an operation error is made in the first stop operation, whereas FIG. 20E is a specific example when an operation error is made in the second stop operation. . As shown in FIG. 20 (e), when the batting order replay X 1 is won, the instruction information “1” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Thereafter, when the first left stop operation (the correct answer pressing order) is performed, the display on the instruction display 16 does not change from the instruction information “1”. When the second right stop operation (loss order) is performed after the first left stop operation, immediately after that, the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 instead of the instruction information. Although illustration is omitted, in the AT state or the start preparation state, when any one of the batting order replay X2 to the batting order replay X6 is won, and when the second stop operation is performed in the losing order, the second stop operation is performed. Immediately after the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the instruction display 16 displays instruction information, and the stop button is operated in a manner other than the operation mode indicated by the instruction information (when an operation error is made). Information (operation error information) different from the instruction information displayed on the instruction display 16 is displayed on the instruction display 16. According to the above configuration, an operation error can be notified to the player.

  In the present embodiment, operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 immediately after an operation error is made. Assume a configuration in which operation error information is not displayed immediately after an operation error is made. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which operation error information is displayed after the third stop operation is conceivable. In the above configuration, when operation error information is displayed after specific instruction information is displayed, depending on the player, it is determined whether an operation error has been made in the first stop operation or an operation error has been made in the second stop operation. In fact, even when an operation mistake is made in the first stop operation, it may be mistaken for an operation mistake in the second stop operation. That is, there is a case where it is misunderstood that no operation mistake is made in the first stop operation. In the above case, when the above-described specific instruction information is displayed, there may be an inconvenience that it becomes easy to make an operation mistake again in the first stop operation. In view of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, operation error information is displayed immediately after an operation error is made. With the above configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the time of an operation error, and the above-described inconvenience is suppressed.

  FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a change in the display mode of the instruction display 16 in the end preparation state (period in which the pressing order application effect is executed). As shown in FIG. 21, also in each game in the end preparation state, the instruction display period TS is a period from when the game start operation is performed until the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 21A is a specific example when the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state. As described above, when the batting order bell L is won in the finish preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction information “10” or the instruction information “11” by lottery and displays it on the instruction display 16 (see FIG. 19). . FIG. 21A is a specific example when the batting order bell L is won and the instruction information “10” is determined. As described above, when the instruction information “10” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation at the left first stop or the middle first stop. In the specific example of FIG. 21A, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. That is, the specific example in FIG. 21A assumes a case where the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the middle bell. When the instruction information “10” is displayed and the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the instruction information “10” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS.

  FIG. 21B is a specific example when the batting order bell C is won in the end preparation state. As described above, when the batting order bell C is won in the finish preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction information “10” or the instruction information “12” by lottery and displays it on the instruction display 16 (see FIG. 19). In the specific example of FIG. 21B, as in FIG. 21A, the instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. Assumed. That is, the specific example of FIG. 21B assumes a case where the stop operation is performed in the middle-bell dismissal order. If the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing out, there is a possibility that the upper and middle bells may be missed as shown in FIG. When the instruction information “10” is displayed and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the instructed loss pressing order, the instruction information “10” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS.

  As described above, when the instruction information “10” (the first left stop and the middle first stop are instructed) is displayed and the first left stop operation is performed, the left first stop is the correct push of the middle bell. Regardless of the order, the instruction information “10” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS. Although illustration is omitted, when the instruction information “10” is displayed (similar to FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B) and when the middle first stop operation is performed, the middle first stop is performed. The instruction information “10” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS regardless of whether or not is the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell. Further, when the instruction information “11” (instructing the first left stop and the first right stop) is displayed and the first left stop operation or the first right stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is in the middle stage. The instruction information “11” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS regardless of whether or not the bells are correctly pressed. Further, when the instruction information “12” (instruction of middle first stop and right first stop) is displayed and the middle first stop operation or right first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is in the middle stage. The instruction information “12” is continuously displayed in the instruction display period TS regardless of whether or not the bells are correctly pressed.

  As understood from the above description, when the instruction information “10” to “12” is displayed and the stop operation is performed in one of the instructed stop operation orders, the stop operation order is correct for the middle bell. The instruction information is continuously displayed on the instruction display 16 during the instruction display period TS, regardless of the pressing order or the loss pressing order. In the above configuration, it cannot be determined from the display on the instruction display 16 in the instruction display period TS whether the current stop operation order is the correct answer push order or the lose push order.

  If the instruction information “10” to “12” is displayed, the operation error information described above is displayed in place of the instruction information and displayed immediately after the stop operation is performed in accordance with the instructed loss pressing order (hereinafter, “ It is called “proportional”. In the above comparison, immediately after the first stop operation, it is recognized from the display of the instruction display 16 that the stop operation has been performed in the order of pressing the loss. In this embodiment, it cannot be determined from the display on the instruction display 16 during the instruction display period TS whether the current stop operation order is the correct answer push order or the lose push order. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation for the correct pressing order can be easily maintained in the instruction display period TS, as compared with the above-described proportionality.

  FIG. 21C is a specific example when the batting order bell L is won and the instruction information “10” is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the end preparation state, as in FIG. 21A. . However, in the specific example of FIG. 21C, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed at the first right stop. As described above, the instruction information “10” indicates that the stop operation should be performed at either the left first stop or the middle first stop. That is, the specific example in FIG. 21C assumes a case where the stop operation is performed while ignoring the instructed stop operation order. As shown in FIG. 21C, when the first right stop operation is performed in the game in which the instruction information “10” is displayed, the operation error information “-” is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the instruction information “11” (indicating left first stop and right first stop) is displayed and the middle first stop operation is performed, immediately after that, operation error information is displayed. Is displayed on the instruction display 16. Further, when the instruction information “12” (instruction of middle first stop and right first stop) is displayed and the first left stop operation is performed, immediately after that, the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display. 16 is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the instruction display 16 performs the stop operation at the left first stop or the middle first stop in the game displaying the instruction information “10” instructing the left first stop and the middle first stop. If the instruction information is “10”, the display of the instruction information “10” is continued. If the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the display is switched from the instruction information “10” to the operation error information. In addition, in the game in which the instruction information “11” instructing the first left stop and the first right stop is displayed, the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “ 11 "is continued, and when the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop, the display is switched from the instruction information" 11 "to the operation error information. Further, in the game in which the instruction information “12” for instructing the middle first stop and the right first stop is displayed, the instruction indicator 16 displays the instruction information “ 12 ”is continued, and when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the display is switched from the instruction information“ 12 ”to the operation error information. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the game is displayed with the instruction information indicating the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode, and the stop operation is performed in the third stop operation mode, the instruction information Switches to other information. In the above configuration, an operation error is notified to the player by the instruction display 16.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining commands (first command and second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. The main CPU 301 transmits various commands including the first command and the second command to the sub CPU 412 during a period from the time when the game is started until the time when the stop operation becomes possible. The sub CPU 412 determines various effects (an instruction effect described later, a navigation effect, etc.) in accordance with commands from the main CPU 301.

  By the way, conventionally, a configuration (hereinafter referred to as “prior art”) in which a sub CPU determines whether or not to notify a stop operation mode (for example, correct pressing order of winning combination) advantageous to a player is known. In the above prior art, the main CPU transmits a command capable of identifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player to the sub CPU regardless of the gaming state. In the AT state, the sub CPU notifies an advantageous stop operation mode identified by a command from the main CPU. On the other hand, in the normal state, the sub CPU does not notify the stop operation mode even if an advantageous stop operation mode can be identified by a command from the main CPU. That is, in the above prior art, the payout rate is controlled by the sub CPU.

  However, in the prior art, an illegal act of replacing the sub control board with an illegal board among the main control board having the main CPU and the sub control board having the sub CPU may be a problem. With the above illegal board, for example, in a game in a normal state, it is possible to analyze a command from the main CPU and illegally notify an advantageous stop operation mode identified from the command. In the above case, the probability that an advantageous stop operation mode is notified becomes higher than in the case of playing with an appropriate sub-control board. That is, according to the above-described fraudulent substrate, the payout rate is illegally improved.

  In view of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, even if the sub-control board 400 is replaced with an unauthorized board, it is configured that it is difficult to illegally improve the payout rate. Specifically, in the normal state in which the correct pressing order of each winning combination (batting order replay, batting order bell) is not notified, the correct pressing of each winning combination is determined from the commands (first command and second command) transmitted by the main CPU 301. It was set as the structure which cannot identify order. According to the above configuration, in the normal state, an illegal act in which the notification of the correct pressing order of the winning combination is executed by the illegal board is suppressed. Hereinafter, the first command and the second command transmitted from the main CPU 301 of this embodiment will be described in detail.

  As illustrated in FIG. 22, the main CPU 301 transmits the first commands “A00” to “A13” to the sub CPU 412 according to the winning area. For example, when the winning area of this game is lost, the main CPU 301 transmits a command “A00” to the sub CPU 412. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “A01” when the batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won, and transmits the command “A02” when the BAR replay is won, and the normal replay is won. In this case, the command “A03” is transmitted. Similarly, when the batting order bell (L1 to L4, C1 to C4, R1 to R4) is elected, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “A04”, and when the common bell is elected, the command “A05” is transmitted. When the watermelon is won, the command “A06” is sent. When the weak cherry is won, the command “A07” is sent. When the strong cherry is won, the command “A08” is sent, and the weak chance is won. In this case, the command “A09” is transmitted, the command “A10” is transmitted when the strong chance is won, the command “A11” is transmitted when the small role ALL is won, and the command is received when the duplicate bonus is won. When “A12” is transmitted and the single bonus is won, the command “A13” is transmitted.

  According to the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 may be able to identify the winning area of the current game from the first command. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 can determine an effect according to the winning area by the first command. For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A05” (common bell), the sub CPU 412 can determine the bell navigation effect informing that the common bell is won. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A06”, the sub CPU 412 can determine the watermelon navigation effect for notifying the winner of the watermelon.

  However, as shown in FIG. 22, the command “A01” is the same as the first command when any one of the hit order replay X1 to the hit order replay X6 or the hit order replay Y1 to the hit order replay Y3 is won. In the above configuration, when the command “A01” is received, the sub CPU 412 can identify that one of the hitting order replays of all the winning areas has been won, but the type of winning order replay (winning area number) ) Cannot be identified.

  As described above, the correct answer pressing order of the RT2 transition replay when the batting order replay X is won depends on the type of the batting order replay X. Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay in the current game cannot be identified from the first command. In addition, as described above, the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y is won depends on the type of the batting order replay Y. Therefore, the correct answer pressing order of the RT3 transition replay in the current game cannot be identified from the first command.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the first command when the batting order bell L (1-4), batting order bell C (1-4) or batting order bell R (1-4) is won is common to the command “A04”. is there. With the above configuration, the type (L, C, R) of the hitting bell cannot be identified from the first command. In addition, as described above, the correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell is won depends on the type of batting order bell. Therefore, the correct pressing order of the middle bells in the current game cannot be identified from the first command.

  As described above, correct push order of RT2 transition replay when batting order replay X is won, correct push order of RT3 transition replay when batting order replay Y is won, and correct push of middle bell when batting order bell is won The order cannot be identified from the first command. That is, in the configuration of this embodiment, it can be said that an advantageous stop operation sequence (stop operation sequence for improving the payout rate) when the hitting order replay or the hitting bell is won cannot be identified from the first command.

In addition to the first command described above, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command (B01 to B12, B99) corresponding to the instruction number (instruction information) of the current game to the sub CPU 412.
As described above, the instruction number determined in each game corresponds to the correct pressing order of the winning combination in the game. Therefore, the correct pressing order of each winning combination (RT2 transition replay, RT3 transition replay, middle bell) may be identified from the above second command.

  Specifically, when the instruction number “99” (no instruction) is determined in the current game, the main CPU 301 transmits a command “B99” to the sub CPU 412 as shown in FIG. As described above, the instruction number “99” is determined in each game in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the command “B99” is transmitted every game. The instruction number “99” is determined when a winning area (such as a loser) other than the batting order replay (X, Y) and batting order bell (L, C, R) is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. . Furthermore, the instruction number “99” is determined when the winning area other than the batting order bell is won in the finish preparation state. Note that when the instruction number “99” (no instruction) is determined in this game, the second command may not be transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the main CPU 301 determines that the batting order replay X1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, and determines the instruction number “01” (left middle right order) (see FIG. 18B). ), The command “B01” is transmitted. Further, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B02” when the batting order replay X2 is elected in the AT state or the start preparation state and determines the instruction number “02” (the order in the left and right), and the batting order replay X3 When winning and determining the instruction number “03” (middle left and right order), the command “B03” is transmitted, and the batting order replay X4 is won and the instruction number “04” (middle right and left order) is determined. When the command “B04” is transmitted, the batting order replay X5 is won, and the instruction number “05” (the order in the middle left and right) is determined, the command “B05” is transmitted, the batting order replay X6 is won, and the instruction number “06” "(Order of middle right and left) is determined, the command" B06 "is transmitted. Further, when the batting order replay Y1 or the batting order bell L (1 to 4) wins and the instruction number “07” (first left stop) is determined in the AT state or the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines that the command “B07 Is transmitted to the sub CPU 412. Similarly, when the batting order replay Y2 or batting order bell C (1 to 4) wins and the instruction number “08” (medium first stop) is determined in the AT state or the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines that the command “ B08 "is transmitted, and when the batting order replay Y3 or batting order bell R (1 to 4) is won and the instruction number" 09 "(first right stop) is determined, the command" B09 "is transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10” (first left stop or middle first stop) when the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state (FIG. 19). Reference) and the command “B10” is transmitted. On the other hand, if the batting order bell L is won and the instruction number “11” (first left stop or first right stop) is determined, the command “B11” is transmitted. The main CPU 301 transmits the command “B10” when the batting order bell C is won in the end preparation state and the instruction number “10” is determined. On the other hand, when the batting order bell C is won and the instruction number “12” (the middle first stop or the right first stop) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B12”. The main CPU 301 transmits the command “B11” when the batting order bell R is won in the end preparation state and the instruction number “11” is determined. On the other hand, when the batting order bell R is won and the instruction number “12” is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B12”.

  As will be described in detail later, when the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect according to the second command. The instruction effect is executed by, for example, the liquid crystal display device 30, and the stop operation order of the instruction number specified by the second command is instructed. In the present embodiment, the combination of the first command “AXX” (X is an integer equal to or smaller than 9) and the second command “BYY” (Y is an integer equal to or smaller than 9) transmitted in the current game is transmitted pattern “ AXX, BYY "may be described.

  As described above, it is not possible to specify the hitting order replay and the correct pressing order of the hitting bell from the first command. In the normal state, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B99” (no instruction) as the second command in all winning areas. In the above configuration, the transmission pattern (combination of the first command and the second command) is selected in the normal state regardless of whether the batting order replay X1 to the batting order replay X6 or the batting order replay Y1 to the batting order replay Y3 is won. ) Is common to “A01, B99”. In the normal state, even if any batting order bell of batting order bell L, batting order bell C, or batting order bell R is won, the transmission pattern is common to “A04, B99”. Therefore, in the normal state, it is not possible to identify the striking order replay and the correct pushing order of the striking order bell from the first command and the second command. On the other hand, since the second command is different for each type of batting order replay, the transmission pattern when the batting order replay is won in the AT state is different for each type of batting order replay. Further, since the second command is different for each type of batting order bell, the transmission pattern when the batting order bell is won in the AT state is different for each type of batting order bell. Therefore, in the AT state, the batting order replay and the batting order bell correct pressing order can be identified from the command (second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301.

  According to the present embodiment, in the normal state, a command that can identify the correct answer pressing order of the winning combination is not transmitted from the main CPU 301. Therefore, even if the sub control board 400 is replaced with an unauthorized board, if the main CPU 301 is in a normal state, the unauthorized board cannot identify the correct pressing order of the winning combination from the command of the main CPU 301. According to the above configuration, fraudulent acts that illegally improve the payout rate by the unauthorized substrate are suppressed. In the AT state, a command that can identify the correct pressing order of the winning combination is transmitted from the main CPU 301. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 can determine an instruction effect instructing the correct pressing order of the winning combination in the AT state. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the AT state, the sub CPU 412 can determine the effect of instructing the correct pressing order, and can suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent acts that illegally improve the payout rate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the type (winning area number) of the batting order replay and the batting order bell cannot be identified from the first command. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, any one of the winning areas of BAR replay, normal replay, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, weak chance eyes, strong chance eyes, duplicate bonus, and single bonus is won. In this case, first commands “A02”, “A03”, “A05” to “A13” that can identify the winning area are transmitted from the main CPU 301. In the present embodiment, the winning area that can be identified from the first command may be referred to as a “non-group winning area”.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 14 described above, the stop operation position where each winning combination can be drawn into the active line is defined for each non-group winning area. Therefore, when the type (winning number) of the non-group winning area is notified (for example, a watermelon winning notification or a strong chance winning notification), the player is selected as a winning combination (for example, a watermelon combination or a single piece combination B). Can be identified.

  In the above configuration, a fraudulent act in which the first command is analyzed by the fraudulent board, the type of the non-group winning area is notified, and the payout rate is fraudulently increased can be considered. In view of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, even if the type of the non-group winning area is illegally notified, the influence on the payout rate is limited. Specifically, each winning area, which has a relatively small influence on winning rate by winning notification, was adopted as each non-group winning area. Hereinafter, the influence which each winning alert | report of each non-group winning area has on the payout rate will be described.

  As described above, when a watermelon is won, a watermelon role can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the watermelon role is to stop the left reel 12L at the symbol positions “9” to “13” or the symbol positions “16” to “20”, and to move the middle reel 12C to the symbol position “ When the stop operation is performed at 9 ”to“ 13 ”and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions“ 19 ”,“ 20 ”,“ 0 ”to“ 2 ”, the reels are stopped and displayed on the active line, and the reels are displayed at other symbol positions. If 12 is stopped, it will be lost. In the above configuration, in the game where the watermelon is won, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the watermelon role can be pulled in, the payout rate is improved as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the watermelon role is missed. Therefore, when the watermelon winning notification is made, the payout rate can be improved by performing a stop operation in a stop operation mode in which the watermelon role can be drawn into the effective line. In the above configuration, if the winning notification of watermelon is made illegal, the payout rate may become illegally high.

  However, as described with reference to FIG. 15 described above, the player usually performs a stop operation in a specific operation mode (a so-called small role collection batting method, a DDT batting method, a KKK batting method, or the like). Specifically, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol position “9” or the symbol position “10”, the middle reel 12C is stopped at the symbol positions “9” to “13”, and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol position “9”. The stop operation is performed at “19”, “20”, “0” to “2”. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. That is, in a game in which a watermelon is won, when a stop operation is performed in a normal procedure (specific operation mode), the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of whether or not the watermelon is notified.

  As understood from the above description, when it is assumed that a game is played in a specific operation mode, there is no difference in the payout rate between the case where the watermelon winning is notified and the case where the watermelon is not notified. Therefore, even if the watermelon winning notification is fraudulent, there is no substantial effect on the payout rate (small).

  As described above, when the weak cherry is won, the corner cherry can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the square cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “7” to “11”, and the left reel 12L is stopped at other symbol positions. Missed when the stop operation is performed. In the above configuration, in a game where a weak cherry is won, when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the corner cherry can be pulled in, the payout rate is improved compared to when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the corner cherry is dropped. . Therefore, when the winning notification of the weak cherry is given, the payout rate can be improved by performing a stop operation in a stop operation mode in which the corner cherry can be drawn into the effective line. In the above configuration, when the winning notification of the weak cherry is made illegal, the payout rate may become illegally high.

  However, as described with reference to FIG. 15 above, when a game is won by a weak cherry and a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the corner cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of whether or not the weak cherry is notified. The Therefore, even if the weak cherry winning notification is fraudulent, there is no substantial effect on the payout rate (small).

  As described above, when the strong cherry is won, the middle cherries can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, the middle cherries are stopped and displayed on the effective line when the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “6” to “10”, and the left reel 12L is displayed at other symbol positions. Missed when the stop operation is performed. In the above configuration, in a game where a strong cherry is won, if the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the middle cherries can be pulled in, the payout rate is improved compared to when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the middle cherries are dropped. . Therefore, when a strong cherry winning notification is made, the payout rate can be improved by performing a stop operation in a stop operation mode in which the middle cherries can be drawn into the effective line. In the above configuration, when the winning notification of strong cherry is made illegal, the payout rate may become illegally high.

  However, as described with reference to FIG. 15 above, in the game in which the strong cherry is won, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the middle cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of whether or not the strong cherry is notified. The Therefore, even if the strong cherry winning notification is fraudulent, there is no substantial effect on the payout rate (small).

  As described with reference to FIG. 14 above, in the game where the common bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation mode. That is, in a game in which the common bell is won, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of whether or not the common bell has been won. Therefore, even if the common bell winning notification is fraudulent, there is no substantial effect on the payout rate (small).

  As described above, when the weak chance is won, one-piece combination A can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, in the single A, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “3” to “7”, and the middle reel 12C is stopped at the symbol positions “1” to “5” or the symbol. When the stop operation is performed at the positions “14” to “18” and the right reel 12R is operated to stop at the symbol positions “18” to “20” “0” “1”, the stop is displayed on the active line, and at other symbol positions. It is missed when each reel 12 is stopped. In the above configuration, in a game in which the weak chance is won, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the single player A can be pulled in, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the single player A is dropped. Increased cypress rate. Therefore, when the winning notification of the weak chance is given, the payout rate can be improved by performing the stop operation in a stop operation mode in which the single-sheet combination A can be drawn into the active line.

  As described with reference to FIG. 15 described above, unlike the watermelon or cherry combination, the single-sheet combination A is missed when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode. In the above configuration, in a game that has been notified of the winning chance of the weak chance, the stoppage operation is improved at the stop operation position where the single player A can be pulled in, so that the payout rate is improved as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode. To do. In other words, if the winning of the weak chance is notified illegally, the payout rate may increase illegally.

  However, the number of payouts for a single combination A in this embodiment is less than or equal to the prescribed number (three) for starting a game. Specifically, the number of payouts for a single combination A is 1 (the minimum number of payouts). Therefore, even if a single combination A is stopped and displayed on the active line due to unauthorized notification, it is not possible to obtain more medals than the number of medals (three) required to start the game. In the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the number of payouts for a single combination A is larger than a specified number (for example, 15), the effect on the payout rate when the winning notification of the weak chance is made illegal. Can be small.

  As described above, when the strong chance is won, one-piece combination B can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 14, in the one-piece combination B, the left reel 12L is stopped at the symbol positions “3” to “7”, and the middle reel 12C is stopped at the symbol positions “1” to “5” or the symbol. When the stop operation is performed at the positions “14” to “18” and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions “5” to “9”, “13” to “17”, the symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the other symbol positions are displayed. If the reels 12 are stopped, the operation is lost. In the above configuration, in a game in which a strong chance is won, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where one player B can be pulled in, a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where one player B is missed. Increased cypress rate. Therefore, when the winning notification of the strong chance is made, it is possible to improve the payout rate by performing a stop operation in a stop operation mode in which the single winning combination B can be drawn into the active line.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 15, the one-piece combination B, like the one-piece combination A, is missed when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode. In the above configuration, in a game in which a strong chance of winning is notified, the payout rate is improved by performing a stop operation at a stop operation position where the single player B can be pulled in, compared to a case where the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode. To do. In other words, if the winning of the strong chance is notified by an unauthorized method, the payout rate may be increased illegally.

  However, in the present embodiment, the number of payouts for the single winning combination B is equal to or less than the prescribed number (three) for starting the game, as with the single winning combination A. Specifically, the payout number of the single combination B is one. In the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the payout number of one winning combination B is larger than a prescribed number, the influence on the payout rate when the strong chance winning notification is made illegal can be reduced.

  As described above, when a single bonus is won, the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line. As described with reference to FIG. 14, the bonus combination is performed by stopping the left reel 12L at the symbol positions “1” to “5” and the middle reel 12C at the symbol positions “1” to “5” or the symbol position “ When the stop operation is performed at 14 ”to“ 18 ”and the right reel 12R is stopped at the symbol positions“ 6 ”to“ 10 ”, the stop is displayed on the active line, and each reel 12 is stopped at the other symbol positions. If you miss it. That is, the bonus combination is missed in the specific operation mode like the one-piece combination B (see FIG. 15).

  However, if the bonus combination is missed in the winning game, the winning state is carried over in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if a bonus combination is missed in the winning game, the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line in subsequent games. In the above configuration, the difference in the payout rate is relatively small between the case where the bonus combination is won and the stop line is displayed on the active line, and the case where the bonus line is not displayed. Therefore, the influence on the payout rate when the winning notification of the single bonus is illegal is small.

  As described above, when the duplicate bonus is won, the bonus combination and the watermelon combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line. As for the bonus combination, the winning state is carried over in the game after the duplicate bonus is won. In addition, the number of watermelon payouts is 5, which is larger than the specified number (3) required to start the next game. Therefore, in a game in which a duplicate bonus is won, when a stop operation is performed at a symbol position where a watermelon role can be drawn, the payout rate is the highest. In other words, when the winning notification of the duplicate bonus is made, the payout rate can be improved by performing a stop operation in a stop operation mode in which the watermelon role can be drawn into the active line.

  In the above configuration, when the winning notification of the duplicate bonus is made illegal, the payout rate may become illegally high. However, as described above, the watermelon combination of the present embodiment is stopped and displayed on the active line when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode (normal procedure). That is, when it is assumed that a game is played in a specific operation mode, a watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of whether or not there is a duplicate bonus winning notification. Therefore, even if the duplicate bonus winning notification is illegal, there is no substantial effect on the payout rate (small).

  As described above, when the BAR replay is won, the BAR replay or the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line according to the stop operation mode (see FIG. 12). For example, when the winning notification of the batting order replay X1 is made, since the player recognizes the correct pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay, the winning notification affects the payout rate. However, BAR replay is not an RT transition symbol (see FIG. 16). In a game where BAR replay is won, regardless of the stop operation mode, BAR replay or normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the right to replay is given (no replay loss occurs). As described above, when the BAR replay is won, the payout rate does not change according to the stop operation mode. Therefore, even if the BAR replay winning notification is made illegal, the payout rate is not improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning area (winning order replay, batting order bell) that has a great influence on the payout rate is not identified from the first command as the type of winning area (winning area number). did. On the other hand, for the winning area (non-group winning area) where the effect of the winning notification on the payout rate is small, the type of the winning area can be identified from the first command. According to the above configuration, various effects can be executed by the sub CPU 412 according to the type of the non-group winning area while suppressing the illegal act of increasing the payout rate by the unauthorized notification described above. That is, it is possible to diversify the production while suppressing fraud.

   FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B are conceptual diagrams of each spinning effect determination table (A, B). The main CPU 301 determines whether or not to execute each rotation effect in the rotation effect determination process. In the spinning effect, the main CPU 301 changes each reel 12 in a predetermined manner. Each rotator effect includes a rotator effect A, a rotator effect B, a rotator effect C, and a rotator effect D, and each reel 12 has a different aspect for each rotator effect. In addition, the aspect of each reel 12 in each turning effect can be set as appropriate. Moreover, the mode of each reel 12 in each spinning production may be the same as each other.

  Each turning effect determination table includes a turning effect determination table A shown in FIG. 23 (a) and a turning effect determination table B shown in FIG. 23 (b). The main CPU 301 determines the rotation effect using the rotation effect determination table A in each game in the normal state and the end preparation state. Further, the main CPU 301 determines the spinning effect using the spinning effect determination table B in each game in the AT state and the start preparation state.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), each turning effect determination table includes each lottery value for each winning area. In addition, each lottery value includes a lottery value of “no effect”, a lottery value of the rotating effect A, a lottery value of the rotating effect B, a lottery value of the rotating effect C, and a lottery value of the rotating effect D. Yes. Each lottery value is determined in the order of “no effect” to the rotation effect D in the process of determining the rotation effect (order of no effect → rotation effect A → rotation effect B → rotation effect C → rotation effect D). It is subtracted from the random value R2 (0 to 255). The main CPU 301 determines the spinning effect of the lottery value in which the subtraction result is a negative number. For example, in the normal state, it is assumed that the common bell is won and the random value R2 is a numerical value “240”. When the common bell is won in the normal state, the lottery value “244” of “no effect” is subtracted from the random value R2, as shown in FIG. Since the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R2 (240-244 = −4) becomes a negative number, the main CPU 301 determines not to execute the spinning effect in the current game. Also, for example, assume that the common bell is won and the random value R2 is a numerical value “245” in the normal state. In the above case, the result of subtracting the “no effect” lottery value from the random value R2 (245−244 = 1) does not become a negative number, and thereafter the lottery value “4” of the spinning effect A is subtracted from the subtraction result. If it does, it becomes a negative number. Therefore, the main CPU 301 determines the spinning effect A.

  The main CPU 301 transmits an effect type command indicating the spinning effect determined in each game to the sub CPU 412. The effect type command is transmitted in the period from the time point when the game is started to the time point when the stop operation is possible, like the first command and the second command (see FIG. 22). The sub CPU 412 determines an effect according to the effect type command. In addition, the transmission time of the production type command can be changed as appropriate.

  By the way, in the configuration in which the production type command (rotation production) is drawn in accordance with the winning area, depending on how the lottery value of each round production is assigned, the type of the winning area (correct pressing order of the winning role) is the production type command. In some cases, identification (guessment) is possible. In the above case, the hitting order replay or the correct pressing order of the hitting bell may be identified from the effect type command. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 23 (c-1) and FIG. 23 (c-2), a description will be given of the proportionality in which the type of the winning area can be estimated from the effect type command.

  FIG. 23 (c-1) is a conceptual diagram of a proportional spinning effect determination table. The comparative main CPU 301 determines the spinning effect using the spinning effect determination table in each game in the normal state. The proportional rotation effect determination table includes the lottery values of the respective rotation effects as in the case of the rotation effect determination table of the present embodiment. In FIG. 23 (c-1), each lottery value in the case where the batting order bell (L, C, R) wins among the lottery values for each drum effect is extracted and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), in the comparative example, when the batting order bell L is won in the normal state, the lottery value of “no effect” is the numerical value “0”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect A is the numerical value “ The lottery value of “254”, the spinning effect B and the spinning effect C is a numerical value “1”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect D is a numerical value “0”. Accordingly, when the batting order bell L is won in the normal state, “no effect” and the spinning effect D are not determined. Further, when the batting order bell L is won in the normal state, the turning effect A is determined with the probability 254/256, the turning effect B is determined with the probability 1/256, and the turning effect C is determined with the probability 1/256. Is done. That is, when the batting order bell L is won, the spinning effect A is determined with the highest probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), in the comparative example, when the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, the lottery value of “no effect” is a numerical value “0”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect B is The lottery value of the value “254”, the spinning effect A and the spinning effect C is the value “1”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect D is the value “0”. Therefore, when the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, “no effect” and the spinning effect D are not determined. Further, when the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, the turning effect A is determined with a probability of 1/256, the rotating effect B is determined with a probability of 254/256, and the rotating effect C is determined with a probability of 1/256. Is done. That is, when the batting order bell C is won, the rotation effect B is determined with the highest probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), in the comparative case, when the batting order bell R is won in the normal state, the lottery value of “no effect” is a numerical value “0”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect C is The lottery value of the value “254”, the spinning effect A and the spinning effect B is the value “1”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect D is the value “0”. Therefore, when the batting order bell R is won in the normal state, “no effect” and the spinning effect D are not determined. Further, when the batting order bell C is won in the normal state, the turning effect A is determined with the probability 1/256, the turning effect B is determined with the probability 1/256, and the turning effect C is determined with the probability 254/256. Is done. That is, when the batting order bell R is won, the spinning effect C is determined with the highest probability.

  As described above, the probability that the batting order bell L wins, the probability that the batting order bell C wins, and the probability that the batting order bell R wins are equal to each other (see FIG. 9). Therefore, in the above comparison, when the turning effect A is determined, the probability that the batting order bell L is won is higher than the probability that the batting order bell C or the batting order bell R is won. Further, when the turning effect B is determined, the probability that the batting order bell C is won is higher than the probability that the batting order bell L or the batting order bell R is won. Similarly, when the turning effect C is determined, the probability that the batting order bell R is won is higher than the probability that the batting order bell L or the batting order bell C is won.

  In the above comparison, as in the present embodiment, the first command, the second command, and the effect type command are transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. Hereinafter, a combination of the first command, the second command, and the effect type command transmitted by the main CPU 301 is referred to as a transmission pattern “AXX, BYY, effects AD, or“ no effect ”” (X and Y are integers of 9 or more). May be described. For example, a case where a first command “A04” indicating a batting order bell, a second command “B99” (see FIG. 22) indicating “no instruction”, and an effect type command indicating a spinning effect A are transmitted from the main CPU 301. Suppose. In the above case, the transmission pattern is expressed as “A04, B99, production A”.

  FIG. 23 (c-2) is a diagram for explaining a transmission pattern when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won in the normal state in comparison. As shown in FIG. 23 (c-2), the first command is “A04” in common when the batting order bell L is won, when the batting order bell C is won, and when the batting order bell R is won. Yes, in the normal state, the second command is “B99” regardless of the winning area. In addition, as described above, when the batting order bell is won, the turning effect A, the turning effect B, or the turning effect C is determined, and the effect type commands are “effect A”, “effect B”, or “effect C”. become. Therefore, the transmission pattern when the batting order bell is won in the normal state is “A04, B99, production A” or “A04, B99, production B” or “A04, B99, production C shown in FIG. "

  In contrast, as described above, when the turning effect A is determined, the probability that the batting order bell L is won is higher than the probability that the other batting order bells (C, R) are won. Therefore, in the comparative example, when each command is transmitted with the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect A”, it is possible to identify from each command that the hitting bell L has the highest probability. Similarly, when the production B is determined, the probability that the batting order bell C is won is higher than the probability that other batting order bells are won. Therefore, when each command is transmitted with the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect B”, it can be identified from each command that the hitting bell C has the highest probability. Similarly, when the production C is determined, the probability that the batting order bell R is won is higher than the probability that other batting order bells are won. Therefore, when each command is transmitted with the transmission pattern “A04, B99, production C”, it is possible to identify from each command that the hitting bell R has the highest probability.

  In the above comparison, even if the second command indicates “no instruction”, it is possible to guess the type of hit order bell that has been won by the command from the main CPU 301. Therefore, in the above comparison, it is possible to perform an illegal act of replacing the sub-control board 400 with an illegal board, causing the illegal board to analyze the effect type command, and notifying the correct pressing order of the batting order bell. In consideration of the above circumstances, the turning effect determination table A of the present embodiment is configured so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to guess the correct pressing order of each winning area from the effect type command.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the turning effect determination table A of the present embodiment is different from that described above in that each lottery value of each turning effect is common for each batting order bell (L, C, R). It is different from the proportional reel production determination table. Specifically, when the batting order bell L is won, the lottery value of “no production” is a numerical value “244”, the lottery value of the rotation effect A is a numerical value “10”, and the rotation effect B and the rotation The lottery value for the effect C is a numerical value “1”, and the lottery value for the spinning effect D is a numerical value “0”. Further, as understood from FIG. 23 (a), each lottery value for each turn effect when the batting order bell C is won is the same as when the batting order bell L is won. Furthermore, each lottery value of each spinning production when the batting order bell R is won is the same as when the batting order bell L or the batting order bell C is won. That is, if any batting order bell is won, regardless of the type of batting order bell, “no effect” is determined with a probability of 244/256, and the spinning effect A is determined with a probability of 10/256, and the rotating effect is achieved. B is determined with a probability 1/256, the spinning effect C is determined with a probability 1/256, and the rotating effect D is not determined. That is, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect type command indicating “no effect” is transmitted with the same probability regardless of the type of the hitting order bell. Similarly, each of the effect type command indicating the rotation effect A, the effect type command indicating the rotation effect B, and the effect type command indicating the rotation effect C are transmitted with the same probability regardless of the type of the hitting order bell. Is done. Further, the effect type command indicating the spinning effect D is not transmitted regardless of the type of the hitting order bell.

  In the above configuration, the probability that each command is transmitted from the main CPU 301 in the transmission pattern “A04, B99, no effect” for the first command, the second command, and the effect type command is independent of the type of the hit order bell. Will be equal. Similarly, the probability of transmission with the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect B”, the probability of transmission with the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect B”, and the transmission pattern “A04, B99, effect C”. Probability is equal regardless of the type of hit order bell. Therefore, it is impossible to identify (guess) the type of batting order bell from the transmission pattern of each command. That is, in this embodiment, the correct pressing order of the middle bell cannot be identified from each command including the effect type command.

  Further, in this embodiment, as understood from FIG. 23A, even when any batting order replay X from batting order replay X1 to batting order replay X6 is won, “no effect” has a probability of 1 (256/256). It is determined. That is, each command is transmitted from the main CPU 301 with the transmission pattern “A01, B99, no effect” regardless of the type of the hitting order replay X (1 to 6). Therefore, the type of the batting order replay X cannot be identified from the transmission pattern when the batting order replay X is won. That is, in this embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay cannot be identified from each command including the effect type command.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as understood from FIG. 23A, “no effect” is determined with a probability of 1 when any batting order replay Y from batting order replay Y1 to batting order replay Y3 is won. That is, each command is transmitted from the main CPU 301 with the transmission pattern “A01, B99, no effect” regardless of the type of the hitting order replay Y (1-3). Therefore, the type of the batting order replay Y cannot be identified from the transmission pattern when the batting order replay Y is won. In other words, in this embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay cannot be identified from each command including the effect type command.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the correct answer pressing order of each winning combination (middle bell, RT2 transition replay, RT3 transition replay) cannot be identified from each command including the effect type command. Therefore, even when the production type command is analyzed by the unauthorized board, it is not possible to identify an advantageous stop operation sequence that improves the payout rate. According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress fraud using the above-described fraudulent board.

  By the way, when the probability that each turning effect is executed is the same for each batting order bell, some players may feel that the turning effect is not interesting. Considering the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the AT state, the probability that each turning effect is executed is made different for each batting order bell.

  FIG. 23B is a conceptual diagram of the rotating effect determination table B. The main CPU 301 of this embodiment determines the spinning effect using the spinning effect determination table B in each game in the AT state and the start preparation state. As understood from FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), each lottery value in each winning area (such as common bell) other than the batting order bell (L, C, R), It is equal to the trunk effect determination table B. Therefore, the probability that each turning effect is determined when the winning area other than the batting order bell is won is equal between the normal state and the AT state. It should be noted that the probability that each turning effect is determined when a winning area other than the batting order bell is won may be made different between the normal state and the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), when the batting order bell L is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the lottery “no effect” is drawn as in the case where the batting order bell L is won in the normal state or the end preparation state. The value is the numerical value “244”, the lottery value of the spinning effect A is the numerical value “10”, the lottery value of the spinning effect B and the rotating effect C is the numerical value “1”, and the lottery effect of the rotating effect D The value is the numerical value “0”. On the other hand, when the batting order bell C is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the lottery value of “no effect” is the numerical value “244”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect B is the numerical value “10”. The lottery value for the revolving effect A and the revolving effect C is a numerical value “1”, and the lottery value for the revolving effect D is a numerical value “0”. That is, when the batting order bell C is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the probability of winning the rotation effect A is lower than the case where the batting order bell C is won in the normal state or the end preparation state. There is a high probability of winning. Further, when the batting order bell R is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the lottery value of “No production” is the numerical value “244”, and the lottery value of the spinning effect C is the numerical value “10”. The lottery value of the trunk effect A and the spinning effect B is a numerical value “1”, and the lottery value of the rotational effect D is a numerical value “0”. In other words, when the batting order bell R is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the probability of winning the rotation order A is lower than the case where the batting order bell R is won in the normal state or the end preparation state. There is a high probability of winning.

  As described above, when the batting order bell is won, the probability of winning each spinning performance is the same in the normal state or the end preparation state regardless of the type of batting order bell, but in the AT state or the start preparation state, It depends on the type of batting order bell. Therefore, for example, in the AT state or the start preparation state, the excitement of the spinning effect is improved as compared with the configuration in which the winning probability of each spinning effect is the same regardless of the type of the hitting bell.

  In the present embodiment, when the batting order bell L is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the effect type command indicating the rotation effect A is the effect type command indicating the rotation effect B and the rotation effect C. It is transmitted with a higher probability than the effect type command shown. In addition, when the batting order bell C is won, the effect type command indicating the rotation effect B is transmitted with higher probability than the effect type command indicating the rotation effect A and the effect type command indicating the rotation effect C. Furthermore, when the batting order bell R is won, the effect type command indicating the spinning effect C is transmitted with higher probability than the effect type command indicating the spinning effect A and the effect type command indicating the spinning effect B. With the above configuration, in the AT state or the start preparation state, it is possible to infer the type of batting order bell from each command transmitted from the main CPU 301. That is, it is possible to guess the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell from each command. However, as described above, the in-AT state and the start preparation state are gaming states in which the correct answering order of the middle bell is indicated by the instruction information on the instruction display 16. Therefore, even if the command from the main CPU 301 is analyzed on the incorrect board in the AT state or the start preparation state, and the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is notified, it does not exceed the original payout rate. .

  FIG. 24 is a conceptual diagram of an AT determination table. The AT determination table includes each lottery value for each winning area. In addition, each lottery value in each winning area is provided according to the spinning effect, and includes a “winning” lottery value and a “non-winning” lottery value. In the AT determination process for each game, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the spinning effect to the random value R3. When the result of subtracting the “winning” lottery value from the random number value R3 becomes a negative number, the main CPU 301 determines the transition to the AT state. According to the above configuration, whether or not to shift to the AT state is determined with a probability corresponding to the winning area and the spinning effect. For example, it is assumed that the batting order bell is won in this game and it is determined not to execute the spinning effect. In the above case, since the lottery value of “winning” is the numerical value “0”, the AT state is not won. On the other hand, it is assumed that the batting order bell is won in this game and the spinning effect A is determined. In the above case, since the lottery value of “winning” is the numerical value “3276”, if the random value R3 is in any of the ranges “0 to 3275”, the winning state is won. Further, it is assumed that the batting order bell is won in this game, and the spinning effect B or the spinning effect C is determined. In the above case, since the lottery value of “winning” is the numerical value “6553”, it is won with a higher probability in the AT state than when the spinning effect A is won in the game in which the batting order bell is won. In FIG. 24, the lottery values for the weak rare combination and the strong rare combination are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the “winning” lottery value when the BAR replay is won is a numerical value “65536”, and the “non-winning” lottery value is a numerical value “0”. In other words, when the BAR replay is won, the AT state is always won. As shown in FIG. 24, the lottery value is “0” when the winning area is other than the batting order bell, the common bell, the weak rare combination, and the strong rare combination (losing, batting order replay, normal replay, bonus). In the example of FIG. 24, when winning BAR replay, the AT is always won, but when winning BAR replay, the AT state may not be won. In addition, when winning areas other than batting order bells, common bells, weak rare roles, and strong rare roles are won, the AT state may be won. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the lottery value for the weak rare role (watermelon, weak cherry, weak chance) is shared, but the watermelon lottery value, the weak cherry lottery value, and the weak chance lottery value are It may be provided separately. Similarly, a lottery value for a strong cherry and a lottery value for a strong chance may be provided separately. Also, a plurality of AT determination tables may be provided. For example, an AT determination table used in the normal state and an AT determination table used in the AT state may be provided.

  The main RAM 303 stores a display permission bit storage area indicating a combination of symbols permitted to stop on the active line, a display setting value storage area for storing a numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36, and a setting value. A set value storage area, a random value R1 storage area in which the random value R1 is stored, a random value R2 storage area in which the random value R2 is stored, a random value R3 storage area in which the random value R3 is stored, and transmitted to the sub-control board 400 A command storage area for storing commands to be executed, a lamp-related data storage area for storing data indicating display modes of various lamps, a winning area storage area for storing a winning area, and the number of stop buttons 25 that are not stopped. A storage area including a non-stop operation counter and a stop order storage area for storing the operation order of each stop button 25 is provided.

<Each data used by sub CPU>
Hereinafter, various data stored in the sub ROM 413 will be described with reference to the drawings. The sub ROM 413 stores various data including an instruction effect determination table shown in FIGS. 25 and 27 and an effect lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a conceptual diagram of the instruction effect determination table (A, B). When the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction number (instruction information), the sub CPU 412 determines one of the instruction effects (A, B, C, D, E) from the instruction effect determination table. When the instruction effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 transmits an effect command indicating the instruction effect to the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420. When receiving an effect command indicating an instruction effect, the image control CPU 421 displays each image of the instruction effect on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the present embodiment, when the sub control board (sub CPU 412) 400 receives the second command, the sub CPU 412 always notifies the stop operation mode (stop operation order) corresponding to the second command.

  FIG. 25A is a conceptual diagram of the instruction effect determination table A. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” (batting order replay X or batting order replay Y) as the first command and receives any of the commands “B01” to “B09” as the second command, the sub CPU 412 The instruction effect is determined by the effect determination table A. As described above, the commands “B01” to “B09” are transmitted when the main CPU 301 is in the AT state or the start preparation state, and are not transmitted in the normal state and the end preparation state. That is, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect by the instruction effect determination table A in a game in which the main CPU 301 is in the AT state or the start preparation state.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, when the command “A01” is received, the sub CPU 412 determines one of the instruction effects A (1 to 6) or each instruction effect B (1 to 3). Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect A1 when the command “A01” is received as the first command and the command “B01” is received as the second command. Also, the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” as the first command, receives the command “B02” as the second command, determines the instruction effect A2, and receives the command “B03” When the instruction effect A3 is determined and the command “B04” is received, the instruction effect A4 is determined. When the command “B05” is received, the instruction effect A5 is determined and when the command “B06” is received, the instruction The production A6 is determined.

  In the above configuration, when the batting order replay X is won and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “01”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “1” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 instructs The production A1 is determined. When the batting order replay X is won and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “02”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “2” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 displays the instruction effect A2. It is determined. Similarly, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “03”, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information “3” on the instruction display 16, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect A 3, and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “04”. "" Is displayed on the instruction display 16 by the main CPU 301, the instruction effect A4 is determined by the sub CPU 412, and when the instruction number "05" is determined by the main CPU 301, the instruction is given by the main CPU 301. When the information “5” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the instruction effect A5 is determined by the sub CPU 412, and the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “06”, the instruction information “6” is displayed on the instruction display 16 by the main CPU 301. The instruction effect A6 is determined by the sub CPU 412. As described above, in the liquid crystal display device 30, the instruction effect according to the stop operation mode (order) of the instruction information displayed by the instruction display 16 is determined.

  In the instruction effect A1 of the present embodiment, the stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed. That is, the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information “1” is also indicated in the instruction effect A1. Further, in the instruction effect A2, the stop operation order “middle left and right” instructed by the instruction information “2” is instructed, and in the instruction effect A3, the stop operation order “middle left and right” instructed by the instruction information “3” is instructed. In the instruction effect A4, the stop operation order “middle right / left” instructed by the instruction information “4” is instructed, and in the instruction effect A5, the stop operation order “middle right / left” instructed by the instruction information “5” is instructed. In the instruction effect A6, the stop operation order “right middle left” indicated by the instruction information “6” is instructed. As described above, the instruction information displayed when the batting order replay X is won indicates the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay. Therefore, in each instruction effect A (1-6), the correct answer pressing order of RT2 transition replay is instructed. As described above, in this embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is instructed by both the instruction information of the instruction display 16 and the instruction effect A of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B1 when the command “A01” is received as the first command and the command “B07” is received as the second command. To do. Further, the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A01” as the first command, receives the command “B08” as the second command, determines the instruction effect B2, and receives the command “B09” The instruction effect B3 is determined.

  In the above configuration, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “07”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “7” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B1. When the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “08”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “8” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B2. Similarly, when the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “09”, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “9” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B3.

  In the instruction effect B1 of the present embodiment, the first left stop is instructed. That is, the stop operation order instructed by the instruction information “7” is also instructed in the instruction effect B1. In the instruction effect B2, the middle first stop is instructed by the instruction information “8”, and in the instruction effect B3, the first right stop instructed by the instruction information “9” is instructed. As described above, the instruction information displayed when the batting order replay Y is won indicates the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay. Therefore, in each instruction effect B (1-3), the correct answer pressing order of RT3 transition replay is instructed. As described above, in this embodiment, the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay is instructed by both the instruction information of the instruction display 16 and the instruction effect B of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  FIG. 25B is a conceptual diagram of the instruction effect determination table B. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A04” (batting order bell) as the first command and receives any of the commands “B07” to “B09” as the second command, the sub CPU 412 uses the instruction effect determination table B. Instruction production (C1-C3, D1-D3) is determined. As described above, the commands “B07” to “B09” are transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412 in the AT state and the start preparation state. That is, when the sub CPU 412 wins the batting order bell in the AT state or the start preparation state, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect using the instruction effect determination table B.

  As understood from FIG. 25B, when “A04” is received as the first command, a plurality of types (two types) of instruction effects (C, D) can be selected according to one second command. When the sub CPU 412 receives “A04” as the first command, the sub CPU 412 selects the instruction effect C or the instruction effect D with a predetermined probability.

  Specifically, when the command “A04” is received and the command “B07” is received, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect C1 or the instruction effect D1. The instruction effect C1 and the instruction effect D1 both instruct the correct answer pressing order of the batting order bell L (first left stop). Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A04” and receives the command “B08”, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect C2 or the instruction effect D2. The instruction effect C2 and the instruction effect D2 both instruct the correct pressing order of the batting order bell C (medium first stop). Similarly, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect C3 or the instruction effect D3 when the command “A04” is received and the command “B09” is received. The instruction effect C3 and the instruction effect D3 both instruct the correct pressing order (right first stop) of the batting order bell R. In the above configuration, when the batting order bell is won, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is instructed by both the instruction information of the instruction display 16 and the instruction effect (C, D) of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  FIG. 25C is a diagram for explaining the probability that the instruction effect C (1-3) is determined and the probability that the instruction effect D (1-3) is determined in the game in which the batting order bell is won. is there. As shown in FIG. 25 (c), the probability that the instruction effect C is determined and the probability that the instruction effect D is determined depend on whether or not the AT state is won in the current game. Specifically, when the batting order bell is won and the AT state is not won, the instruction effect C is determined with a probability of about 99/100, and the instruction effect D is determined with a probability of about 1/100. . On the other hand, when the batting order bell is won and the AT state is won, the instruction effect C is determined with a probability of about 9/10 and the instruction effect D is determined with a probability of about 1/10. For example, it is assumed that the game that received “A04” as the first command and received “B07” as the second command did not win the AT state. In the above case, the instruction effect C1 is determined with a probability of about 99/100, and the instruction effect D1 is determined with a probability of about 1/100. On the other hand, if the game that received “A04” as the first command and “B07” as the second command wins the AT state, the instruction effect C1 is determined with a probability of about 9/10, and the probability is about The instruction effect D1 is determined at 1/10.

  As understood from the above description, in this embodiment, in the game in which the batting order bell is won, the probability that the instruction effect D is determined is higher than that in the case where the AT state is not won (probability is about 1/100). When the state is won (probability about 1/10) is higher. According to the above configuration, when the correct push order of the middle bell is instructed by the instruction effect D, it is notified that the expected degree of winning in the AT state is higher than when the instruction effect C is instructed.

  FIG. 26A-1 is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect A. FIG. FIG. 26 (a-1) shows a specific example of the instruction effect A1 when the batting order replay X1 is won. As described above, in the instruction effect A1, the correct pressing order “left middle right” of the RT2 transition replay in the game in which the batting order replay X1 is won is instructed. Moreover, the specific example of FIG. 26 (a-1) assumes the case where the instruction effect A1 is executed in the start preparation state. In the start preparation state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A-1, a message “Preparing” indicating that the instruction state is the start preparation state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the start preparation state, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays the total number of medals acquired in the current AT state.

  In the instruction effect A (1 to 6), three instruction icon images SX (1 to 3) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Each instruction icon SX includes an instruction icon SX1 that displays a number “1”, an instruction icon SX2 that displays a numeral “2”, and an instruction icon SX3 that displays a numeral “3”. Each instruction graphic SX is, for example, substantially circular and has a color similar to the replay symbol (for example, light blue). The instruction graphic images SX are arranged in the left-right direction, and the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is instructed by the instruction graphic images SX. Specifically, among the arranged instruction graphic images SX, the instruction graphic image SX displayed on the left side indicates an order of stopping the left stop button 25L. In addition, the instruction image SX displayed in the center instructs the order of stopping the middle stop button 25C, and the instruction image SX displayed on the right indicates the order of stopping the right stop button 25R.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a-1), in the instruction effect A1, the instruction icon SX1 is displayed on the left side, the instruction icon SX2 is displayed in the center, and the instruction icon SX3 is displayed on the right (SX1 from the left). , SX2, SX3 order). In the above case, the first stop button 25L is instructed to stop first, the middle stop button 25C is instructed to stop second, and the right stop button 25R is instructed to stop third. That is, the stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed. Although illustration is omitted, in the instruction effect A2, the instruction icon SX1 is displayed on the left side, the instruction icon SX3 is displayed in the center, the instruction icon SX2 is displayed on the right, and the stop operation order “middle left and right” is instructed. The Similarly, in the instruction effect A3, the instruction image SX2 is displayed on the left side, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed in the center, the instruction icon image SX3 is displayed on the right side, the stop operation order “middle left and right” is instructed, and in the instruction effect A4 The instruction image SX3 is displayed on the left side, the instruction image SX1 is displayed on the center, the instruction image SX2 is displayed on the right side, the stop operation order “middle right left” is instructed, and the instruction image SX2 is on the left side in the instruction effect A5. The instruction image SX3 is displayed at the center, the instruction image SX1 is displayed on the right side, the stop operation order “middle right” is instructed, and in the instruction effect A6, the instruction image SX3 is displayed on the left side, and the instruction image SX2 is displayed. The instruction image SX1 is displayed on the right side, and the stop operation sequence “right middle left” is instructed.

  In each instruction effect A, the instruction image SX corresponding to the stop button 25 to be stopped at the current time is displayed in an enlarged manner than the other instruction images SX. For example, in the instruction effect A1 instructing the stop operation order “left middle right” shown in 26 (a-1), it is arranged on the left side immediately after the game is started (a period in which all the reels 12 are rotating). The displayed instruction image SX1 is enlarged and displayed than the other instruction image SX (2, 3). Thereafter, when the left stop button 25L is stopped, the instruction image SX1 is displayed in the same size as the instruction image SX3, and the instruction image SX2 is enlarged and displayed. Thereafter, when the middle stop button 25C is operated to stop, the instruction image SX2 is displayed in the same size as the instruction image SX1, and the instruction image SX3 is enlarged and displayed. According to the above configuration, at each time point, the stop button 25 corresponding to the instruction image SX that is displayed enlarged from the other instruction image SX is stopped, so that the stop operation sequence indicated by the instruction effect A is performed. Stop operation is performed.

  FIG. 26 (a-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect A is executed. FIG. 26 (a-2) shows a specific example of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect A1 is executed. In the period in which the instruction effect A1 is executed, the instruction information “1” (“left middle right” is instructed) is displayed on the instruction display 16 as shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, in the period in which the instruction effect A2 is executed, the instruction information “2” (“middle” is indicated) is displayed on the instruction display 16, and in the period in which the instruction effect A3 is executed, the instruction display is displayed. The instruction information “3” (instruction “middle left / right”) is displayed on the display 16 and the instruction information “4” (instruction “middle right / left”) is displayed on the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect A4 is executed. In the period in which the instruction effect A5 is executed, the instruction information “5” (“middle right” is indicated) is displayed on the instruction display 16, and in the period in which the instruction effect A6 is executed, the instruction display 16 is instructed. Information “6” (indicating “right middle left”) is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (b-1) is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect B. FIG. 26 (b-1) shows a specific example of the instruction effect B1 when the batting order replay Y1 is won. As described above, in the instruction effect B1, the first left stop that is the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay in the game in which the batting order replay Y1 is won is instructed. The specific example in FIG. 26B assumes a start preparation state, as in FIG.

  In the instruction effect B (1-3), the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Specifically, the instruction icon SX1 is displayed in an area corresponding to the stop button 25 to be stopped first. For example, in the instruction effect B1, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed in an area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30, as shown in FIG. In the above instruction effect B1, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L should be stopped first. Although illustration is omitted, in the instruction effect B2, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and the middle stop button 25C is instructed to be first stopped. In the instruction effect B3, the instruction icon image SX1 is displayed on the right side from the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the right stop button 25R should be stopped first.

  In the start preparation state, when the stop operation is performed in the order instructed by the instruction effect B, the RT3 transition replay is stopped on the active line, and the AT state is started. When the AT state is started, for example, a message “START!” May be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 to notify the start of the AT state.

  FIG. 26 (b-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect B is executed. FIG. 26 (b-2) shows a specific example of the instruction display 16 in the period in which the instruction effect B1 is executed. In the period in which the instruction effect B1 is executed, the instruction information “7” (instructed to stop the first left) is displayed on the instruction display 16 as shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the period in which the instruction effect B2 is executed, and the instruction information “9” is displayed in the instruction display 16 in the period in which the instruction effect B3 is executed. Is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (c-1) is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect C. FIG. 26 (c-1) shows a specific example of the instruction effect C1 when the batting order bell L is won. As described above, in the instruction effect C1, the first left stop that is the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the game in which the batting order bell L is won is instructed. In addition, the specific example of FIG. 26C-1 assumes an AT state. As shown in FIG. 26 (c-1), in the AT state, the total number of medals acquired in the current AT state and the total number of games in the AT state (in the example of FIG. 26 (c-1), the number “0”). ”) And the remaining number of games in the AT state (the number“ 50 ”in the example of FIG. 26 (c-1)) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The remaining number of games in the AT state is the current value of the AT counter. The total number of games in the AT state is incremented by “1” for each game, and the remaining number of games is decremented by “1” for each game. When the remaining number of games is subtracted to the numerical value “0”, the state shifts from the AT state to the end preparation state.

  In the instruction effect C (1 to 3), the instruction icon image SY1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The instruction image SY1 displays the number “1” in the same manner as the instruction image SX1. Further, the instruction icon image SY1 is substantially circular like the instruction icon image SX1. However, the instruction graphic image SY1 and the instruction graphic image SX1 have different colors. The instruction graphic SY1 is, for example, the same color (yellow) as the bell symbol. However, a common instruction image may be displayed when the batting order replay is won and when the batting order bell is won.

  The instruction image SY1 is displayed in an area corresponding to the first stop button 25 to be stopped, like the instruction image SX1. For example, in the instruction effect C1, as shown in FIG. 26 (c-1), the instruction icon image SY1 is displayed in an area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the instruction effect C1, the left stop button 25L is instructed to be stopped for the first time. Although illustration is omitted, in the instruction effect C2, the instruction icon image SY1 is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the middle stop button 25C should be stopped first. In the instruction effect C3, the instruction icon image SY1 is displayed on the right side from the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the right stop button 25R should be stopped first.

  FIG. 26 (c-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect C is executed. FIG. 26 (c-2) shows a specific example of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect C1 is executed. As described above, in the period in which the instruction effect C1 is executed, the instruction information “7” (instructed to stop the first left) is displayed on the instruction display 16. In addition, the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16 in the period in which the instruction effect C2 is executed, and the instruction information “9” is displayed in the instruction display 16 in the period in which the instruction effect C3 is executed. .

  As understood from the above description, the sub CPU 412 according to the present embodiment, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “7”, the instruction effect B1 according to the winning combination (batting order replay Y1, batting order bell L). Alternatively, the instruction effect C1 is determined. Further, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “8”, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B2 or the instruction effect C2 according to the winning combination (batting order replay Y2, batting order bell C). Further, when the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “9”, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect B3 or the instruction effect C3 according to the winning combination (batting order replay Y3, batting order bell R). That is, the instruction effect changes according to the winning combination even when the instruction information is the same. According to the above configuration, for example, the instruction effect is rich in change compared to a configuration in which the instruction effect does not change according to the winning combination.

  FIG. 26 (d-1) is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the instruction effect D. As described above, in the game in which the batting order bell is won, when the correct push order of the middle bell is indicated by the instruction effect D, the AT state is won as compared to the case where the instruction effect C is indicated. Probability is high. FIG. 26 (d-1) shows a specific example of the instruction effect D1 when the batting order bell L is won. As described above, in the instruction effect D1, as in the instruction effect C1, the first left stop that is the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the game in which the batting order bell L is won is instructed.

  In the instruction effect D (1-3), the instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. As shown in FIG. 26 (d-1), the instruction icon image SZ1 displays the number “1” in the same manner as the instruction icon image SX1 and the instruction icon image SY1. However, the instruction image SZ1 is different from the instruction image SX and the instruction image SY in the shape (size) of the outer edge. Specifically, the instruction graphic image SX and the instruction graphic image SY described above are substantially circular outer edges, while the instruction graphic image SZ1 is a jagged outer edge. However, the mode of the instruction image SZ1 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the shape of the instruction graphic image SZ1 may be the same as the instruction graphic image SX and the instruction graphic image SY (substantially circular), and the color of the instruction graphic image SZ1 may be different from other instruction graphic images S (for example, purple).

  The instruction graphic image SZ1 is displayed in an area corresponding to the stop button 25 to be stopped first, similarly to the instruction graphic image SX1 and the instruction graphic image SY1. For example, in the instruction effect D1, as shown in FIG. 26 (d-1), the instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed in an area on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above instruction effect D1, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L should be stopped first. In addition, in the instruction effect D2, the instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the middle stop button 25C should be stopped first. In the instruction effect D3, the instruction icon image SZ1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30, and it is instructed that the right stop button 25R should be stopped first.

  FIG. 26 (d-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect D is executed. FIG. 26 (d-2) shows a specific example of the instruction display 16 during the period in which the instruction effect D1 is executed. As described above, in the period in which the instruction effect D1 is executed, the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display 16 (similar to the instruction effect C1). Further, in the period in which the instruction effect D2 is executed, the instruction information “8” is displayed on the instruction display 16 (similar to the instruction effect C2), and in the period in which the instruction effect D3 is executed, the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16. “9” is displayed (similar to the instruction effect C3).

  As described above, in this embodiment, one stop operation order (for example, the first left stop) is instructed for each instruction effect (for example, the instruction effect B1, the instruction effect C1, and the instruction effect D1) having different notification modes. That is, when the sub CPU 412 receives the second command, the instruction effect indicating the operation mode (order) indicated by the second command is the first instruction effect (for example, the instruction effect B1) and the first instruction effect. Can be selected from a plurality of notification effects including a second notification effect (for example, an instruction effect C1 and an instruction effect D1) that is notified in a notification mode different from the first instruction effect. For example, the sub CPU 412 can select the instruction effect B or the instruction effect C (instruction effect D) according to the winning area (batting order replay, batting order bell). Further, the sub CPU 412 can select the instruction effect C or the instruction effect D when the batting order bell is won. According to the above configuration, for example, compared with a configuration in which only one type of instruction effect instructing one stop operation order is provided, the instruction effect is rich in change and the fun is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in addition to the instruction display 16. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 30 is larger than the instruction display 16 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the stop operation order can be notified in a region wider than the instruction display 16. In the above configuration, for example, compared with a configuration in which information indicating the stop operation order is displayed only on the instruction display 16, the player can easily view the information.

  The above is the description of each instruction effect (A to D) in the AT state and the start preparation state. Hereinafter, each instruction effect in the end preparation state will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. When the batting order bell is won in the game in the end preparation state, the sub CPU 412 determines the pushing order application effect E (1-3) as the instruction effect.

  FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram of the instruction effect determination table C. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A04” (batting order bell) as the first command and receives the commands “B10” to “B12” as the second command, the sub CPU 412 indicates the instruction effect ( Push order application). As described above, the commands “B10” to “B12” are transmitted in the end preparation state (see FIG. 19). That is, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect by the instruction effect determination table C in each game in the end preparation state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 27, when the command “A04” is received in the end preparation state, the sub CPU 412 determines any one of the pressing order application effects E (1 to 3). Specifically, when the command “A04” is received as the first command and the command “B10” is received as the second command, the sub CPU 412 determines the pressing order application effect E1. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the command “A04” as the first command and receives the command “B11” as the second command, the sub CPU 412 determines the pressing order application effect E2 and sets the command “A” as the second command. When “B12” is received, the pressing order application effect E3 is determined.

  In the above configuration, when the batting order bell (L or C) is won in the finish preparation state and the instruction number “10” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “10” on the instruction display 16. Then, the sub CPU 412 determines the pushing order application effect E1. If the batting order bell (L or R) is won and the instruction number “11” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “11” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 presses the pushing order. The production E2 is determined. If the batting order bell (C or R) is won and the instruction number “12” is determined, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “12” on the instruction display 16 and the sub CPU 412 presses the pushing order. The production E3 is determined.

  In the pushing order application effect E1 of the present embodiment, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the middle first stop, similarly to the instruction information “10”. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “10” on the instruction display 16 is displayed, it is indicated that the stop operation should be performed at the left first stop or the middle first stop even in the pushing order application effect E1 of the liquid crystal display device 30. Instructed. Further, in the pushing order application effect E2, as in the case of the instruction information “11”, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the first right stop. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “11” on the instruction display 16 is displayed, it is indicated that a stop operation should be performed at the first left stop or the first right stop even in the pushing order application effect E2 of the liquid crystal display device 30. Instructed. Further, in the pushing order application effect E3, it is instructed that the stop operation should be performed at the middle first stop or the right first stop, similarly to the instruction information “12”. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “12” on the instruction display 16 is displayed, it is indicated that the pushing operation E3 of the liquid crystal display device 30 should be stopped at the middle first stop or the right first stop. Instructed.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the pressing order application effects E (1 to 3). As described above, each pushing order application effect E is executed when the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state. If the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state and the upper and middle bells are missed, the state shifts to the RT1 state and the AT state ends. On the other hand, when the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state and the middle or upper bell stops at the active line, the AT state continues. That is, each pushing order application effect E is executed in a game in which the AT state can end. As shown in FIG. 28, in each pushing order application effect E, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays a message indicating that the AT state can be continued if the middle bell or the upper bell can be stopped on the effective line.

  FIG. 28 (a-1) is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pushing order application effect E1. As described above, the pushing order hitting effect E1 is executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state, and with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell C is won. (See FIG. 19). FIG. 28 (a-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during a period in which the pushing order application effect E <b> 1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 28 (a-2), the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “10” during the period in which the pushing order application effect E1 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a-1), a plurality (two) of instruction graphic images SA are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pushing order application effect E1. Each instruction icon SA displays, for example, the symbol “?” (Question mark) as shown in FIG. In addition, the instruction icon image SB is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pushing order application effect E1. The instruction graphic image SB represents, for example, the symbol “x” (cross mark). Each instruction icon image SA and instruction icon image SB are arranged in the left-right direction. Specifically, each instruction icon SA is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop button 25 to be subjected to the first stop operation. In addition, the instruction image SB is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop button 25 that should not be subjected to the first stop operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-1), in the pushing order application effect E1, the instruction graphic image SA is displayed in each of the region on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the region near the center. Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (a-1), in the pushing order application effect E1, the instruction image SB is displayed in a region on the right side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above pushing order application effect E1, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L or the middle stop button 25C should be stopped first.

  FIG. 28 (b-1) is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pushing order application effect E 2. As described above, the pushing order hitting effect E2 is executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell L is won in the end preparation state, and with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell R is won. (See FIG. 19). FIG. 28 (b-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during a period in which the pushing order application effect E <b> 2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 28 (b-2), the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “11” during the period in which the pushing order application effect E <b> 2 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), in the pushing order application effect E 2, as in the pushing order application effect E 1, the instruction graphic images SA and the instruction graphic images SB are arranged on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the right direction. However, the order of arrangement of the instruction graphic images SA and the instruction graphic images SB differs between the pushing order effect E1 and the pushing order effect E2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), in the pushing order application effect E 2, the instruction image SA is displayed in each of the area on the left side of the screen center and the area on the right side of the center of the liquid crystal display device 30. Is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), in the pushing order application effect E 2, the instruction graphic image SB is displayed near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 (between each instruction graphic image SA). In the above pushing order application effect E2, it is instructed that the left stop button 25L or the right stop button 25R should be first stopped.

  FIG. 28 (c-1) is a simulation diagram of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the pushing order application effect E <b> 3. As described above, the pushing order hitting effect E3 is executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell C is won in the end preparation state, and with a probability of about 1/2 when the batting order bell R is won. (See FIG. 19). FIG. 28 (c-2) is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 during a period in which the pushing order application effect E <b> 3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 28 (c-2), the instruction display 16 displays the instruction information “12” during the period in which the pushing order application effect E <b> 3 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (c-1), in the pushing order application effect E 3, each instruction graphic image SA and instruction graphic image SB is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the same manner as the other pushing order application effects E (1, 2). Arranged in the left-right direction. However, the order of arrangement of each instruction graphic image SA and instruction graphic image SB is different between the pushing order effect E3 and the other pushing order effect E. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28 (c-1), in the pushing order application effect E3, the instruction image SA is displayed in each of the vicinity of the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 and the region on the right side of the center. Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (c-1), in the pushing order application effect E 3, the instruction image SB is displayed in a region on the left side of the screen center of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above pushing order application effect E3, it is instructed that the middle stop button 25C or the right stop button 25R should be first stopped.

  Fig.29 (a) is a conceptual diagram of the production | presentation lottery table of this embodiment. The effect lottery table is provided in accordance with, for example, the instruction state and the presence / absence of the spinning effect. Specifically, an effect lottery table in the case where the spinning effect is not executed in the normal state, an effect lottery table in the case where the spinning effect is executed in the normal state, and an effect lottery when the rotation effect is not executed in the AT state There are provided a table and an effect lottery table in the case of executing the spinning effect in the AT state. In the present embodiment, the effect lottery table when the spinning effect is not executed in the normal state is shown in FIG. 29A, and the other effect lottery tables are not shown. Different production lottery tables may be provided depending on the types (A to D) of the spinning production.

  The sub CPU 412 determines an effect in each game using the effect lottery table. In each game of the normal game, each effect including a normal effect, a watermelon navigation effect, a cherry navigation effect, a bell navigation effect, a chance effect, a final effect, an aim effect, and a development effect is executed. The effect lottery table includes each lottery value V for each first command (A00 to A13). Each lottery value V is provided for each effect. In FIG. 29A, the lottery value V other than the numerical value “0” is larger than the numerical value “0”.

  The sub CPU 412 determines the effect of the game using the random value R4 and each lottery value V in the effect lottery process of each game. Specifically, in the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts the random effect value R4 from the lottery value VT of “no effect” in the order of the lottery value VH of the development effect. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the effect of the lottery value in which the result of subtraction to the random value R4 becomes a negative number. For example, when the command “A09” (weak chance) is received, the sub CPU 412 subtracts the lottery value VNJ of “no effect” from the random value R4. When the result of subtracting the lottery value VNJ from the random number value R4 is a negative number, the sub CPU 412 determines not to execute the effect. On the other hand, when the subtraction result is not a negative number, the lottery value VTJ of the normal effect is subtracted from the subtraction result. When the subtraction result of the lottery value VTJ for the normal effect is a negative number, the sub CPU 412 determines the normal effect.

  As described above, the type of batting order replay won in this game cannot be identified from the command “A01” when the batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 determines the effect based on the common lottery value V (for example, the lottery value VNB) regardless of the type of batting order replay. Further, as described above, the type of batting order bell won in this game cannot be identified from the command “A04” when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 determines the effect based on the common lottery value V (for example, the lottery value VNE) regardless of the type of the hitting bell. With the above configuration, when the hitting bell or hitting replay is won in the normal state, the correct pressing order of the middle bell or RT transition replay is not notified (implied) by each effect.

The watermelon navigation effect is determined when a watermelon (watermelon role) is won. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value for the watermelon navigation effect is a numerical value “0” except when the command “A06” is received (when the watermelon is won). In the watermelon navigation effect, for example, a graphic image representing a watermelon design is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above watermelon navigation effect, the winning of watermelon is notified. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a watermelon navigation effect is performed by the game other than watermelon winning. For example, a configuration in which a watermelon navigation effect is executed in a game in which a duplicate bonus (watermelon combination + bonus combination) is won may be adopted.
.

  The cherry navigation effect is determined when a weak cherry (horn cherry) or a strong cherry (middle cherry) is won. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the cherry navigation effect is a numerical value “0” except when the command “A07” is received or the command “A08” is received. In the cherry navigation effect, for example, a graphic image representing a cherry symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above Cherry Navi production, the winning of the cherry role (horn cherry, middle cherry) is notified. Note that a configuration in which a cherry navigation effect is executed in a game won by a player other than the cherry role may be adopted.

  The bell navigation effect is determined when a common bell (middle bell) is won. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the bell navigation effect is a numerical value “0” except when the command “A05” is received (when the common bell is won). In the bell navigation effect, for example, a graphic image representing a bell symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above bell navigation effect, the winning of the common bell is notified. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a bell navigation effect is performed by the game other than a common bell.

  The chance effect is determined when the strong chance (1st hand B) is won. As shown in FIG. 29A, the chance effect lottery value is a numerical value “0” except when the command “A10” is received. In the chance effect, for example, a message “Chance!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above configuration, when the chance effect is executed, the player can recognize that the strong chance eye (one piece B) is won. It should be noted that a chance effect may be executed in a game other than the strong chance game.

  The finalized effect is determined when a single bonus (bonus combination) is won in the non-group winning area. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the lottery value of the confirmed effect is a numerical value “0” except when the command “A13” is received. In the confirmed effect, for example, a message “bonus confirmed!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above configuration, when the finalized effect is executed, the player can recognize that the single bonus has been won. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a finalization effect is performed by the game other than the single bonus. For example, it is good also as a structure where a definite effect is performed by the game where the duplication bonus was won.

  The aiming effect is determined when BAR replay or normal replay is won in the non-group winning area. As shown in FIG. 29A, the lottery value of the aiming effect is a numerical value “0” except when the command “A02” or the command “A03” is received. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which aim effect is performed by the game which won other than single BAR replay or normal replay. For example, it is good also as a structure by which aim production is performed only when BAR replay is elected.

  FIG. 30A-1 is a simulation diagram of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in an aiming effect. As shown in FIG. 30 (a-1), in the aiming effect, the instruction image SW <b> 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Each instruction icon SW1 displays the number “1”. The instruction graphic image SW1 has, for example, a substantially circular shape. As shown in FIG. 30 (a-1), in the aiming effect, the instruction image SW1 is displayed on the right side from the center of the screen. In the above-mentioned aiming effect, the first right stop that is the correct answer pressing order of the BAR replay is instructed. In the aiming effect, a message “reverse press” is displayed in addition to the instruction image SW1. However, either the instruction icon SW or the message “reverse pressing” may be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 30A-1, the white BAR icon image GW is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the aiming effect. The white BAR icon image GW represents the white BAR symbol of each reel 12. In FIG. 30 (a-1), each reel 12 is instructed to aim at the white BAR symbol. In the above-mentioned aiming effect, it is instructed that each reel 12 should be stopped at a timing at which the white BAR symbol can be stopped at the first stop on the right. In a game in which BAR replay is won, when a stop operation is performed according to the instruction, the BAR replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination of “white BAR−white BAR−white BAR” is displayed on the upper line. On the other hand, in the game in which BAR replay is won, when the stop operation is not performed in the operation mode instructed by the aiming effect, the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In the game where the normal replay is won, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the instruction of the aiming effect, the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination “star bell-white BAR-white BAR” is displayed on the upper line. . That is, in the game where the normal replay is won, when the stop operation is performed according to the instruction of the aiming effect, the white BAR symbol is tempered on the upper line at the time of the second stop operation, but the left reel 12L is operated for the third stop. In the upper stage of the left reel 12L, the star bell symbol stops instead of the white BAR symbol. When the normal replay is won, the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of whether the instruction for aiming effects is followed or not.

  FIG. 30A-2 is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 16 in the aiming effect. As described above, when BAR replay or normal replay is won, “no instruction” is determined regardless of the instruction state (see FIG. 18). Therefore, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction display 16 in the aiming effect.

  In the normal state of the present embodiment, for the batting order bell and batting order replay that can greatly affect the payout rate, an effect (instruction effect) according to the type of the winning area is not executed, but the effect on the payout rate is small. For the group winning combination, an effect (such as a watermelon navigation effect) according to the type of the winning area is executed. According to the above configuration, for example, the production is rich in change compared to a configuration in which no production according to the type of the winning area is executed. Also, in the normal state, the production according to the type of the winning area is limited to the production according to the type of non-group winning role that has a small effect on the payout rate, so the production can be played while the production is varied. The influence that can be given to the rate can be reduced. According to the above configuration, for example, when a player (advanced player) who knows an advantageous stop operation mode that can be identified by an effect plays, and a player who does not know an advantageous stop operation mode that can be identified by an effect The difference in the payout rate from when a (novice) game is reduced. Therefore, even beginners can play with peace of mind.

  Returning to FIG. As understood from FIG. 29 (a), when the watermelon, weak chance, strong chance, duplicate bonus, or single bonus is won in this game, the development effect may be determined. When the development effect is determined, the continuous effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 30 over the next three games. Specifically, when the development effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 determines a defeat scenario or a victory scenario. In addition, the sub CPU 412 causes a continuous effect corresponding to the determined scenario to be executed over three games.

  FIG. 29B is a conceptual diagram of the scenario lottery table. The sub CPU 412 determines a scenario using the scenario lottery table. The scenario lottery table is provided according to the instruction state, for example. As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the scenario lottery table includes a lottery value for the defeat scenario and a lottery value for the victory scenario. A lottery value for each scenario is provided for each winning area. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R4, and a scenario in which the subtraction result becomes a negative number is determined. As understood from FIG. 29B, when the watermelon, the weak chance eye, or the strong chance eye is won, a defeat scenario is determined. On the other hand, when a duplicate bonus or a single bonus is won, a winning scenario is determined. That is, the defeat scenario is determined when the bonus combination is not won, and the victory scenario is determined when the bonus combination is won.

  In the continuous effect, for example, an animation in which a teammate character and an enemy character fight is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 over three games. When the defeat scenario is determined, an animation in which the teammate character loses is displayed in the final game of the continuous performance. On the other hand, when the victory scenario is determined, an animation in which the teammate character wins is displayed in the final game of the continuous performance. That is, the winning or losing of the teammate character is notified in the final game of the continuous performance. In the above configuration, it is notified whether or not a bonus combination is won in the final game of the continuous performance. The sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute the notification effect when the continuous effect ends.

  As described above, when the bonus combination is won, the main CPU 301 sets the initial value “3” in the transition counter to maintain the normal state for three games. That is, the main CPU 301 does not shift to the bonus notification state (AT state) until three games have elapsed since the bonus combination was won. Therefore, the instruction state of each game of the continuous effect is in the normal state even when the bonus combination is won or when the bonus combination is not won. In the above configuration, the player does not recognize whether or not the bonus combination has been won, depending on the instruction state (whether or not the instruction information is displayed) in each game of the continuous effect. If the instruction information is displayed in the middle of the continuous performance and the winning of the bonus combination is notified, the player may feel that the fun of the continuous performance and the notification performance is lost. According to the structure of this embodiment, since instruction information is not displayed in a continuous production, the inconvenience that the interest of a continuous production and a notification production is impaired is suppressed.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining a period in which the instruction information is displayed and a period in which each effect (instruction effect, navigation effect) is executed. FIG. 31 shows a period during which instruction information is displayed and a period during which each effect is executed in one game.

  FIG. 31A is a diagram for explaining a period in which instruction information is displayed and a period in which the instruction effect is executed in a game in which the batting order bell is won and the spinning effect is not executed. . As shown in FIG. 31A, when a game start operation is performed, a wait period is started. As described above, the wait period is provided in order to make the average time length of each game longer than 4.1 seconds. If the time length from the time of the previous game start operation to the time of the current game start operation exceeds 4.1 seconds, the wait period of the current game is 0 seconds. Further, as described above, when the wait period ends, the acceleration period starts. The acceleration period includes a period for accelerating each reel 12 to a constant speed. When the acceleration period ends, a stop operation acceptance period starts. The stop operation acceptance period is a period during which a stop operation for each stop button 25 can be accepted. When the third stop operation is accepted, all the reels 12 are stopped, and the stop operation acceptance period ends.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, when a game start operation is performed, the second command (B07 to B09) is transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. Immediately after transmitting the second command, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information (7 to 9). In the above configuration, the timing at which the second command is transmitted and the indication information display start time PA1 are substantially the same. The main CPU 301 may be configured to transmit the second command after the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16. As shown in FIG. 31A, the instruction display 16 continuously displays the instruction information until the third stop operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, when the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 immediately causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute the instruction effects (C1 to C3, D1 to D3). Specifically, when the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 immediately transmits an effect command for executing the instruction effect to the image control CPU 421. When the image control CPU 421 receives the effect command, the sub CPU 412 displays the instruction effect. The liquid crystal display device 30 is immediately executed. In the above configuration, the time point at which the second command is received and the start point PB1 of the instruction effect are substantially the same. As shown in FIG. 31A, the liquid crystal display device 30 continues to execute the instruction effect until the third stop operation is performed.

  As described above, the display start time PA1 of the instruction information on the instruction display 16 is substantially the same as the time when the second command is transmitted. In addition, the start point PB1 of the instruction effect in the liquid crystal display device 30 is substantially the same as the time when the second command is received. The time length required for transmission / reception of the second command of this embodiment is short enough to be ignored. Therefore, in the above configuration, the instruction information display start time point PA1 and the instruction effect start time point PB1 are also substantially at the same time. Although not shown in the drawing, in the game where the batting order replay is won, the time when the instruction information is displayed and the time when the instruction effect is executed are almost the same as the game where the batting order bell is won.

  By the way, in the configuration in which the stop operation mode is instructed by both the instruction information and the instruction effect, a player who wants to pay attention to the instruction information and a player who wants to pay attention to the instruction effect are assumed. If the time point when the instruction effect is started is later than the time point when the instruction information starts to be displayed, a player who wants to pay attention to the instruction effect has a waiting time until the instruction effect is executed after the instruction information is displayed. . On the other hand, when the display time of the instruction information is later than the start time of the instruction effect, a player who wants to pay attention to the instruction information has a waiting time from when the instruction effect is executed until the instruction information is displayed. . Considering the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 of the present embodiment starts displaying instruction information almost simultaneously with the instruction effect. With the above configuration, the waiting time of each player described above is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the instruction information display start time PA1 and the instruction effect start time PB1 are before the start time of the stop operation reception period. According to the above configuration, the correct pressing order of each winning combination is instructed by the instruction information and the instruction effect before the start of the stop operation reception period. Assume a configuration in which the correct pressing order of each winning combination is instructed after the start of the stop operation reception period. In the above configuration, depending on the player, there may be a problem that the stop operation is performed in an order other than the correct answer pressing order before the correct answer pressing order is instructed. In the present embodiment, since the correct answer pressing order is instructed before the stop operation becomes possible, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed.

  FIG. 31B is a diagram for explaining a period in which instruction information is displayed and a period in which the instruction effect is executed in the game in which the turn order bell is won and the rotation effect is executed. is there. In the above case, when the game start operation is performed, the spinning effect is started as shown in FIG. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a spinning effect is started after the wait period passes.

  The main CPU 301 executes the spinning effect in a period of a predetermined time length (for example, about 2 seconds to 5 seconds). Execution time of each spinning effect is different. Further, during the period in which the spinning effect is executed, the liquid crystal display device 30 executes the effect during the freeze. The effect during freezing may be provided for each rotation effect, or may be common to each rotation effect. In the effect during the freeze, the stop operation order is not instructed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the turning effect is finished, the acceleration period is started. If 4.1 seconds have not elapsed since the last game start operation at the end of the turning effect, the process proceeds to the acceleration period via the wait period. As shown in FIG. 31 (b), during the acceleration period, the main CPU 301 transmits the second command to the sub CPU 412, and then causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information. In the example of FIG. 31B, the indication information display start time point PA2 is immediately before the stop operation reception period is started (substantially simultaneously with the start time of the stop operation reception period). Note that the time point at which the second command is transmitted is sufficient if it is before the start point of the stop operation acceptance period, and is not limited to the acceleration period.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the liquid crystal display device 30 executes the effect during the freeze until the stop operation reception period is started, and executes the instruction effect substantially simultaneously with the start time of the stop operation reception period. That is, the start time of the stop operation acceptance period and the start time PB2 of the instruction effect are substantially simultaneous. As understood from the above description, in the configuration of FIG. 31B, the display start time point PA2 of the instruction information and the start time point PB2 of the instruction effect are substantially simultaneous.

  In the above configuration, the instruction information display start time point PA2 and the instruction effect start time point PB2 are substantially the same, and therefore, attention is paid to the instruction information as in the case where the spinning effect is not executed (FIG. 30A). The waiting time for the stop operation order instruction is reduced for both the player and the player who pays attention to the instruction effect. Note that “substantially simultaneous” in the present embodiment does not require that the start time point PA (1, 2) and the start time point PB (1, 2) coincide completely. Specifically, it is sufficient that the player perceives that the start time point PA and the start time point PB are substantially the same. There may be a game in which the start time point PA and the start time point PB are not substantially the same.

  FIG. 31C is a diagram for explaining a period in which a navigation effect (for example, a watermelon navigation effect) is executed in a game where a rare role (for example, a watermelon) is won and a rotation effect is executed. is there. As described above, the navigation effect notifies (suggests) the winning combination of this game. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when a game start operation is performed, the effect during freezing is executed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the same manner as the game in which the batting order bell is won (the above-mentioned FIG. 31 (b)). Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command during the acceleration period. However, the second command transmitted when the rare combination is won is “B99” (no instruction). In the above case, the instruction display 16 does not display instruction information. The start point PC of the navigation effect is substantially the same as the start point of the stop operation reception period, as in the case of the instruction effect.

  Assume that in a game in which a spinning effect is performed, a stop operation order is instructed immediately after a start operation (hereinafter referred to as “proportional”). For example, a configuration in which the instruction display 16 displays instruction information immediately after the start operation is conceivable. In the above comparison, the instruction information is displayed in the effect during the freeze. However, the instruction information is displayed when the batting order bell is won, and is not displayed when the rare combination is won. Therefore, when the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player recognizes that the batting order bell is won in the current game. That is, it can be said that before the stop operation acceptance period is started, it is recognized that the rare combination is not won in the current game. In the above comparison, the effect (instruction effect or navigation effect) executed at the start of the stop operation acceptance period can be estimated, and some players may feel that the effect is not interesting. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured such that the stop operation order is not instructed during the spinning effect period. According to the above configuration, it is difficult to estimate the effect to be executed until the navigation effect or the instruction effect is executed, and the above-described inconvenience is suppressed as compared to the proportional effect. However, the stop operation order may be instructed by the instruction information or the instruction effect during the period in which the spinning effect is executed.

  The sub RAM 414 includes storage areas for storing data generated and updated by the sub CPU 412 executing each process.

<Each process executed by the main CPU>
The main CPU 301 executes various processes using the above-described data. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the startup process of the main CPU 301. When the reset signal from the reset circuit is input, the main CPU 301 executes a startup process. The reset signal is output when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of power supply voltage to the main control board 300 is started by turning on the power switch 511SW, the startup process is executed.

  When the startup process is started, the main CPU 301 executes a startup initialization process (S1). The main CPU 301 initializes each register of the main control board 300 by the startup initialization process. The main CPU 301 may execute a security check process for determining the validity of the control program stored in the main ROM 302 before the startup initialization process.

  After the startup initialization process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting switch is in an ON state (S2). The setting switch is turned on when a setting key is inserted into a key hole provided inside the gaming machine 1 and rotated. When determining that the setting switch is in the ON state (S2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a setting change start command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S3), and proceeds to the setting change process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the setting switch is not in the ON state (S2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether a backup flag is stored in the main RAM 303 (S4). In the present embodiment, when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 falls below a predetermined threshold (when the power is shut off), the main CPU 301 backs up each data stored in the main RAM 303 and A backup flag is stored in the RAM 303. Therefore, if the backup is executed normally when the power is turned off, the backup flag is stored in the main RAM 303.

  When determining that the backup flag is stored (S4: YES), the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 303 (S5). In the present embodiment, even when the power is turned off, the checksum of the main RAM 303 is calculated and stored, similarly to step S4 of the startup process.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the checksum calculated at step S4 (checksum at power-on) matches the checksum calculated at power-off (S6). If the data in the main RAM 303 has not changed during the period from when the power is turned off to when it is turned on, the checksum when the power is turned on matches the checksum when the power is turned off. On the other hand, if the data in the main RAM 303 changes (deteriorates) during the period from when the power is turned off to when the power is turned on, the checksum when the power is turned on does not match the checksum when the power is turned off.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the checksum at power-on and the checksum at power-off match (S6: YES), the main CPU 301 determines when the power is shut down based on each data stored in the main RAM 303 (backup is performed). Each register is returned to the state at the time of execution (S7). When the state of each register is restored, the main control board 300 is in a state at the time when the power is shut off. When the main CPU 301 restores the state of each register (the state of the main control board 300), the main CPU 301 resumes the processing from the step at the time when the power is shut off. When the main CPU 301 returns the state of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301 transmits various information necessary for returning the effect state of the gaming machine 1 to the sub control board 400.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the backup flag is not stored (S4: NO), or determines that the checksum at power-on and the checksum at power-off do not match (S6: NO), A main RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the main RAM 303 is set (S8). That is, when the backup cannot be executed, or when the data in the main RAM 303 changes while the power is off, the main RAM abnormality flag is set. During the period in which the main RAM abnormality flag is set, the main CPU 301 notifies the abnormality of the main RAM using, for example, the main display ML. The main RAM abnormality flag is cleared, for example, when the set value changing process is normally executed.

  After setting the main RAM abnormality flag, the main CPU 301 proceeds to RAM error processing. In the RAM error processing, the progress of the game is prohibited. In the RAM error processing, the main CPU 301 may transmit a command for notifying the abnormality of the main RAM 303 to the sub control board 400, and the liquid crystal display device 30 may display a warning image, for example.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the setting change process. When the setting change process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the front door 3 is opened (S11). For example, a door sensor that outputs an OFF signal when the front door 3 is closed and an ON signal when the front door 3 is opened is provided, and the front door 3 is opened according to a signal from the door sensor. A configuration in which the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is present can be employed. As described above, since the setting switch is provided inside the gaming machine 1, the setting change process is normally executed during the period when the front door 3 is open, and the front door 3 is closed. When the setting change process is started in the state, it is assumed that an ON signal of the setting switch and the power switch 511SW is input due to an illegal act. If it is determined that the front door 3 is not opened in consideration of the above circumstances (S11: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the setting switch abnormality flag to the ON state (S12), and proceeds to setting switch error processing. To do. In the setting switch error process, the progress of the game is prohibited. Further, in the setting switch error process, the main CPU 301 may transmit an error command for notifying the abnormality of the setting switch to the sub-control board 400, and the liquid crystal display device 30 may display a warning image, for example. The setting switch abnormality flag is cleared when the starting process is started again and the setting value changing process is normally executed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the front door 3 is opened (S11: YES), the main CPU 301 displays a numerical value indicating the set value on the setting display unit 36 (S13). Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays a numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 on the setting display unit 36.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting change button 37 has been operated (S14). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW. If it is determined that the setting change button 37 has been operated (S14: YES), the main CPU 301 increments the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 (S15), and the process proceeds to step S16. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change button 37 has not been operated (S14: NO), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S16 without incrementing the numerical value in the display setting value storage area.

  In step S16, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the start lever 24 has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an ON signal of the start switch 24SW is input. The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S13 to step S15 until it is determined that the start lever 24 has been operated (S16: NO). As understood from the above description, every time the setting change button 37 is operated and the numerical value in the display setting value storage area is added in step S15, the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is added in step S13. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (S16: YES), the main CPU 301 determines the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 as a setting value (S17). Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a set value command indicating the set value in the command storage area (S18). After storing the set value command, the main CPU 301 ends the set value change process and proceeds to the game control process. In the period of the activation process or the setting change process, interruption of other processes is prohibited, and when the process shifts to the game control process, the interruption is permitted thereafter.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the game control process of the main CPU 301. The game control process is executed every time the player plays a game. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 executes an interrupt process at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1.49 ms) during a period in which the game control process is executed. That is, the main CPU 301 alternately executes a game control process and an interrupt process. For example, a command (for example, a start operation command described later) transmitted to the sub control board 400 is set in the game control process and transmitted to the sub control board 400 in the interrupt process. Each timer (for example, a wait timer) set in the game control process is subtracted in the interrupt process.

  When starting the game control process, the main CPU 301 executes an initial setting process (S101). The initial setting process is executed every time a game is completed. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area that is initialized for each game in the storage area of the main RAM 303.

  After the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to an automatic input process (S102). By the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 sets the same number of betting medals as the previous game as the betting medals of the current game when the combination of symbols relating to the replay is aligned on the active line as a result of the previous game.

  The main CPU 301 shifts to the pre-game start process (S103) after the automatic insertion process. In the pre-game process, the main CPU 301 detects a medal from the medal insertion unit 8 and detects an operation of the settlement button 23. Further, the main CPU 301 detects an operation of the start lever 24 (that is, a game start operation) in the pre-game start process.

  When the main CPU 301 detects a game start operation in the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to a set value confirmation process (S104). In the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 are appropriate. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is within the range of the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “6” in the setting value confirmation process. If the main CPU 301 determines that the setting value is not within the range of the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “6”, the main CPU 301 stores a setting value abnormality command indicating an abnormality in the setting value in the command storage area, and proceeds to setting value error processing. . For example, when a setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed due to noise, a setting value error process is executed. In the set value error process, the main CPU 301 stops the game control process (prohibits the progress of the game). When the set value error processing is executed, for example, when the power button 511 is turned off and then turned on again, the main CPU 301 is caused to execute start-up processing and setting change processing, and normal set values are set. Return to the state where the game is possible.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the set value is appropriate in the set value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 acquires the random value R1, the random value R2, and the random value R3 (S105). The random value R1 is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 304 and is used in the internal lottery process. The random value R2 is a software random number acquired from a register built in the main CPU 301, and is used in a spinning effect determination process or the like. The random value R3 is used in the AT determination process. The main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number value R1 in the random number value R1 storage area of the main RAM 303. Similarly, the main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number value R2 in the random number value R2 storage area of the main RAM 303, and stores the random number value R3 in the random number value R3 storage area of the main RAM 303.

  After the main CPU 301 stores the random value R1, the random value R2, and the random value R3 in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 proceeds to a lottery execution process (S106). In the lottery execution process, an internal lottery process for determining the winning area with the random value R1, an AT determination process for determining the transition to the AT state with the random value R3, and a spinning effect are determined with the random value R2. It is comprised by each process including the rotation effect determination process for. The lottery execution process includes an instruction number determination process for determining an instruction number.

  After executing the lottery execution process, the main CPU 301 executes the wait process (S107). The weight process is a process for setting the time length of each game to a predetermined length or more. In the wait process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait period has elapsed. When determining that the wait period has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 does not shift from the wait process to the pre-stop process described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the wait period has elapsed, the main CPU 301 proceeds to pre-stop processing (S108). In the pre-stop process, various types of data (priority order described later) are stored in the main RAM 303 according to the winning area determined in the internal lottery process. In the stop control process to be described later, each reel 12 is stopped according to each data stored in the pre-stop process, whereby the symbol combination related to the winning combination designated in the winning area is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  After executing the pre-stop process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the stop control process (S109). By the stop control process, the main CPU 301 stops the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 every time each stop button 25 is operated. Each reel 12 stops at a symbol position corresponding to each data set in the pre-stop processing described above.

  When all the reels 12 are stopped by the stop control process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to a display determination process (S110). In the display determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Further, the main CPU 301 sets various data according to the type of combination of symbols displayed on the active line. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 sets the re-game in-operation flag to the ON state. When the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination related to the winning winning combination is stopped on the active line, the main CPU 301 adds the number of medals according to the type of the winning winning combination to the number of credits.

  After executing the display determination process, the main CPU 301 executes a game state transition process (S111). In the gaming state transition process, the main CPU 301 transitions the gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 shifts the RT state according to the RT transition symbol stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when the symbol combination related to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 shifts to the bonus operation state and ends the bonus operation state according to the number of medals paid out. Further, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state by the game state transition process. When the main CPU 301 ends the game state transition process, the process returns to step S101.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the initial setting process at the end of the game. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area for storing information necessary for one game in the storage area of the main RAM 303 (S101-1). For example, the winning area storage area storing the winning area (winning area number) of the previous game is initialized by the initial setting process.

  After initializing the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full (S101-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an ON signal is input from the full tank sensor 530SE. When it is determined that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full (S101-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a full tank error command (S101-3), and proceeds to full tank error processing.

  In the full tank error process, the main CPU 301 notifies the full tank error using the instruction display 16. For example, during the period when the full error process is executed, the main CPU 301 displays the characters “HF” (hopper full) on the instruction display 16. In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports a full tank error with another indicator (for example, the stored number indicator 17). When the main CPU 301 determines that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is not full (S101-2: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the pre-game start process and shifts to an automatic input process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the automatic loading process. When the main CPU 301 starts the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to the replay is aligned on the active line in the previous game (S102-1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a re-game in-operation flag is set. The re-game in-operation flag is set in the display determination process of the previous game control process. When the symbol combination related to replay is not aligned on the active line in the previous game (S102-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the automatic insertion process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the previous game that the symbol combinations related to replay are aligned on the active line (S102-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the input command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S102-). 2). After storing the input command, the main CPU 301 sets the input interval timer (S102-3). The insertion interval timer is a timer for ensuring a time interval at which an insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 to a predetermined time length or more. When the insertion interval timer is set, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion interval timer has expired (S102-4). The main CPU 301 repeats step S102-4 until it determines that the insertion interval timer has expired (S102-4: NO).

  When determining that the insertion interval timer has expired (S102-4: YES), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the betting number counter (S102-5). The betting number counter indicates the number of betting medals for the current game. Further, the main CPU 301 generates BET lamp display data indicating the display mode of the BET lamp 14 (14a, 14b, 14c) according to the value of the betting number counter (S102-6). Specifically, when the betting number counter is a numerical value “1”, BET lamp display data for lighting one lamp 14 a out of the BET lamps 14 is generated. Similarly, when the betting number counter is “2”, BET lamp display data for turning on one lamp 14a and two lamps 14b of the BET lamp 14 is generated, and when the betting number counter is “3”. Generates BET lamp display data for lighting one lamp 14a, two lamps 14b, and three lamps 14c among the BET lamps 14. BET lamp display data is stored in a lamp-related data storage area of the main RAM 303.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the bet number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7). The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S102-2 to step S102-6 until it is determined that the value of the betting number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7: NO). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bet number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the automatic insertion process. As understood from the above description, when the symbol combination related to replay is aligned on the active line as a result of the previous game, the same bet medal as the bet medal of the previous game is set in the current game.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart of pre-game start processing. When the main CPU 301 starts the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 sets a prescribed number with reference to the game state flag in the game state storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-1). In the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to a numerical value “3” for any game.

  After setting the prescribed number according to the gaming state, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the inserted medal acceptance process (S103-2). In the inserted medal acceptance process, the main CPU 301 accepts a medal from the medal insertion unit 8. Further, when the main CPU 301 receives a medal from the medal insertion unit 8, the main CPU 301 adds a bet number counter or a credit number.

  After executing the inserted medal acceptance process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the BET operation acceptance process (S103-3). The main CPU 301 receives the player's operation of the 1BET button 21 or the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 in the BET operation reception process.

  After executing the BET operation reception process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the settlement operation reception process (S103-4). The main CPU 301 receives the player's operation of the payment button 23 in the payment operation reception process.

  After executing the settlement operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the betting number counter is the specified number (S103-5). In the above-described automatic insertion process in step S102, inserted medal reception process in step S103-2, or BET operation reception process in step S103-3, when the betting number counter is added up to the specified number, the main CPU 301 displays the betting number counter. Is the prescribed number (S103-5: YES), and the process proceeds to step S103-6. On the other hand, when the betting number counter has not reached the specified number (S103-5: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes steps S103-2 to S103-4.

  In step S103-6, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the start lever 24 has been operated by the player. When determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (S103-6: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the start operation command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-7). When the start operation command is stored, the main CPU 301 ends the pre-game process and proceeds to a set value confirmation process (S104). On the other hand, when determining that the start lever has not been operated (S103-6: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes the steps from Step S103-2 to Step S103-5.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart of inserted medal acceptance processing. When the inserted medal acceptance process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion disabled flag is in an ON state (S103-2-1). The insertion impossible flag is set to an ON state in S103-2-8, which will be described later, when the betting number counter is the upper limit value and the credit amount is the upper limit value. When the main CPU 301 determines that the insertion impossible flag is in the ON state (S103-2-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the insertion medal acceptance process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 determines that the insertion impossible flag is not in the ON state (S103-2-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 (S103-2-2). ).

  Specifically, as described above, a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 is detected by a signal from the medal sensor 34SE. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 reads a signal from the medal sensor 34SE in an input port reading process of an interrupt process periodically executed, and detects a medal in the main RAM 303 according to the signal from the medal sensor 34SE. Set the flag to the ON state. In step S103-2-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal detection flag is in an ON state.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that a medal has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 (S103-2-2: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted in the command storage area (S103-2-3). ).

  After storing the insertion command, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the betting number counter is a prescribed number (S103-2-4). When determining that the betting number counter is not the prescribed number (S103-2-4: NO), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the betting number counter (S103-2-5), and performs the inserted medal acceptance process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the betting number counter is the prescribed number (S103-2-4: YES), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the number of credits (S103-2-6).

  After adding the number of credits, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of credits matches the upper limit “50” (S103-2-7). When determining that the number of credits is a numerical value “50” (S103-2-7: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a medal insertion impossible flag to an ON state (S103-2-8), and performs a inserted medal acceptance process. finish. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 determines that the number of credits is not the numerical value “50” (S103-2-7: NO), the inserted medal acceptance process is terminated without setting the medal insertion disabled flag to the ON state. . During the period when the medal insertion disable flag is set to the ON state, the main CPU 301 controls the selector 34 so that the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 is guided to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (the tray unit 7) during the period when the medal insertion disable flag is ON.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the BET operation acceptance process. In the BET operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of credits is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-1). When the number of credits is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process.

  When determining that the number of credits is not “0” (S103-3-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the 1BET button 21 is operated (S103-3-2). When it is determined that the 1BET button 21 has been operated (S103-3-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a numerical value “1” in the insertion request counter (S103-3-3). On the other hand, when determining that the 1BET button 21 has not been operated (S103-3-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated (S103-3-4). . When determining that the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated (S103-3-4: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a numerical value “3” in the insertion request counter (S103-3-5). When determining that the MAX-BET button 22 has not been operated (S103-3-4: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process.

  In step S103-3-3 or step S103-3-5, when a predetermined numerical value (numerical value “1” or numerical value “3”) is set in the input request counter, the main CPU 301 sets the numerical value “1” from the input request counter. "Is subtracted (S103-3-6). When “1” is subtracted from the insertion request counter, the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the credit counter (S103-3-7), and adds the numerical value “1” to the betting number counter (S103-3-8). .

  After adding the numerical value “1” to the betting number counter, the main CPU 301 stores the insertion command in the command storage area (S103-3-9). After storing the input command, the main CPU 301 sets the input interval timer (S103-3-10). The insertion interval timer is a timer for ensuring a time interval at which an insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 to a predetermined time length or more. Note that the insertion interval timer of the BET operation acceptance process (S103-3-10) is also used in the automatic insertion process described above. In the BET operation acceptance process (when the MAX-BET button is operated) and the automatic input process, the input command is continuously output and the input sound is continuously reproduced. In this embodiment, since the insertion interval timer is provided, the time interval at which each insertion command is transmitted is ensured to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time length, and the period during which each input sound is output is equal to or longer than the predetermined time length. According to the above configuration, for example, immediately after starting the output of the current input sound, the next input sound is output (the current input sound becomes extremely short), and the current input sound is not perceived by the player. Defects are suppressed. The insertion interval timer is timed up in about 0.5 seconds, for example.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion interval timer has expired (S103-3-11). Step S103-3-11 is repeated until the insertion interval timer expires (S103-3-11: NO). If it is determined that the insertion interval timer has expired (S103-3-11: YES), the main CPU 301 Then, it is determined whether or not the betting number counter matches the specified number (S103-3-12). When the main CPU 301 determines that the bet number counter matches the specified number (S103-3-12: YES), the BET operation acceptance process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the betting number counter does not match the specified number (S103-3-12: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion request counter is a numerical value “0” (S103-3). -13). When it is determined that the insertion request counter is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-13: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the insertion request counter is not the numerical value “0” (S103-3-13: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the credit number is “0” (S103-3-14). ). When the main CPU 301 determines that the number of credits is “0” (S103-3-14: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process and determines that the credit counter is not the numerical value “0” (S103-3). -14: NO), the process is returned to step S103-3-6.

  As understood from the above description, when the main CPU 301 accepts the operation of the MAX-BET button 22, the betting number counter is added until the betting number counter reaches the specified number or the credit number is exhausted.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the settlement operation acceptance process. In the settlement operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the settlement button 23 has been operated by the player (S103-4-1). When it is determined that the settlement button 23 has been operated (S103-4-1: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a settlement medal in the payout request counter (S103-4-2). The settlement medal is the sum of the betting number counter and the credit amount at the time when the settlement button 23 is operated. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a settlement operation command indicating the operation of the settlement button 23 in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-4-3), and sets the medal insertion disable flag to an OFF state (S103-4-4). ).

  When it is determined that the settlement button 23 has not been operated (S103-4-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the settlement operation acceptance process. As will be described in detail later, in the hopper driving process, medals of the number of payout request counters are discharged from the hopper 520 to the tray unit 7 through the medal payout opening 9.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the lottery execution process. When starting the lottery execution process, the main CPU 301 executes an internal lottery process (S106-1). In the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines a winning area for the current game from the random value R1. After executing the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the spinning effect determination process (S106-2). In the spinning effect determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the spinning effect of the current game from the random value R2. After executing the spinning effect determination process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the AT determination process (S106-3).

  In the AT determination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to shift to the AT state from the random value R3. Specifically, in the AT determination process, the main CPU 301 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the spinning effect of the current game from the AT determination table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random value R3. In the normal state, when the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R3 becomes a negative number, the main CPU 301 shifts the instruction state to the start preparation state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag indicating the instruction state from the normal state to the start preparation state. The instruction state flag is stored in the main RAM 303, for example. The main CPU 301 transmits an instruction state command indicating a current instruction state flag to the sub CPU 412 in each game. In the AT state, when the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random number value R3 becomes a negative number, the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the AT stock counter. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a command indicating the result of the AT determination process for the current game in the command storage area. After executing the AT determination process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the instruction number determination process (S106-4). In the instruction number determination process, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the internal lottery process. When starting the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 sets a winning area lottery table according to the gaming state (S106-1-1). For example, the main CPU 301 sets a winning area lottery table according to the RT flag indicating the type of RT state stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303.

  In the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 acquires the random value R1 stored in the random value R1 storage area (S106-1-2). In step 105, the random value R1 is stored in the random value R1 storage area. Further, the main CPU 301 sets the winning area offset value to the initial value “00” (S106-1-3). The winning area offset value designates each winning area. The winning area offset value is updated sequentially, and a different winning area is designated each time it is updated. For example, the winning area offset value is a numerical value “00” and designates a winning area of “losing”.

  The main CPU 301 acquires the lottery value of the winning area designated by the winning area offset value (S106-1-4). For example, when the winning area lottery table in the RT0 state is set, if the winning area offset value is “00”, the lottery value “37042” is acquired.

  The main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired in step S106-1-4 from the random value R1 acquired in step S106-1-1 (S106-1-5). Further, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R1 is a negative number (S106-1-6). For example, in a game in the RT0 state, when a random value R1 smaller than the numerical value “37042” is acquired, the result of subtracting the lottery value “37042” of the winning area number “00” from the random value R1 is a negative number. On the other hand, when the random value R1 larger than the numerical value “37042” is acquired, the result of subtracting the lottery value of the winning area number “00” from the random value R1 does not become a negative number.

  If the main CPU 301 determines that the subtraction result is not a negative number (S106-1-6: NO), whether or not all winning areas (winning area numbers “00” to “32”) are designated by the winning area offset value. Is determined (S106-1-7). When all the winning areas have not been specified (S106-1-7: NO), the main CPU 301 updates the winning area offset value (adds a numerical value “1”) (S106-1-8), and step S106- Return the process to 1-4. In step S106-4, the lottery value of the winning area designated by the updated winning area offset value is acquired, and in step S106-1-5, the lottery value is subtracted from the previous subtraction result. In the processing from step S106-1-4 to step S106-1-8, it is determined that the calculation result is a negative number (S106-1-6: YES) or all winning areas are designated (S106-). 1-7: YES) Repeated.

  When it is determined that the calculation result is a negative number or when all winning areas are designated, the main CPU 301 executes a data storage process (S106-1-9). Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the current winning area offset value in the winning area storage area of the main RAM 303. For example, if the winning area offset value with a negative subtraction result is “12”, the numerical value “12” is stored in the winning area storage area. Further, the main CPU 301 stores the first command corresponding to the winning area in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 in the data storage process. Note that the main CPU 301 transmits the first command stored in the command storage area to the sub-control board 400 in a command transmission process of an interrupt process described later.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the spinning effect determination process. When the main CPU 301 starts the rotation effect determination process, the main CPU 301 acquires various types of information used for determining the rotation effect (S106-2-1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires various types of information including the instruction state of the current game, the winning area, and the random value R2. Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction state is a normal state or an end preparation state (S106-2-2).

  When it is determined that the instruction state is the normal state or the end preparation state (S106-2-2: YES), the main CPU 301 determines the spinning effect of the current game from the spinning effect determination table A (S106-). 2-3). Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains each lottery value corresponding to the winning area of the current game from the rotation effect determination table A for each rotation effect, and sequentially subtracts each lottery value from the random value R2. . For example, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value of each spinning effect from the random value R2 in the order of “no effect”, spinning effect A, spinning effect B, spinning effect C, and spinning effect D. The main CPU 301 repeats until the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R2 becomes a negative number, and determines the spinning effect where the result of subtracting the lottery value becomes a negative number.

  When it is determined that the instruction state is not the normal state or the end preparation state (S106-2-2: NO), that is, in the AT state or the start preparation state, the main CPU 301 uses the rotation effect determination table B this time The spinning effect of the game is determined (S106-2-4). After determining the spinning effect in step S106-2-3 or step S106-2-4, the main CPU 301 stores an effect type command indicating the spinning effect in the command storage area (S106-2-5). .

  After storing the effect type command, the main CPU 301 stores the rotation effect number of the rotation effect in the rotation effect number storage area (S106-2-6). Specifically, in the case of “no effect”, a numerical value “0” is stored in the spinning effect number storage area. In the case of the rotation effect A, the numerical value “1” is stored in the rotation effect number storage area, in the case of the rotation effect B, the value “2” is stored, and in the case of the rotation effect C, the value “3”. Is stored, and in the case of the spinning effect D, the numerical value “4” is stored. After storing the rotation effect number, the main CPU 301 ends the rotation effect determination process.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the instruction number determination process. When starting the instruction number determination process, the main CPU 301 acquires the current instruction state (S106-4-2). After acquiring the instruction state, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction state is a normal state (SS106-4-2). When determining that the instruction state is the normal state (S106-4-2: YES), the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table A (S106-4-3). As described above, in the normal state, the instruction number “99” (no instruction) is determined in all winning areas. On the other hand, when determining that the instruction state is not the normal state (S106-4-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction state is an AT state or a start preparation state (S106-4-). 4).

  When it is determined that the instruction state is the AT state or the start preparation state (S106-4-4: YES), the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table B (S106-4-5). Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates the instruction number “01” when the winning area of this game is batting order replay X1, the instruction number “02” when batting order replay X2, and the instruction number “03” when batting order replay X3. In the case of batting order replay X4, the instruction number “04” is determined. In the case of batting order replay X5, the instruction number “05” is determined. In the case of batting order replay X6, the instruction number “06” is determined. The main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “07” when the winning area of the current game is the batting order replay Y1 or the batting order bell L, and the instruction number “08” when the winning area is the batting order replay Y2 or the batting order bell C. When the winning area is the batting order replay Y3 or batting order bell R, the instruction number “09” is decided.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the AT state or the start preparation state (S106-4-4: NO), that is, if the instruction state is the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 uses the instruction determination table C to indicate Determine the number. Specifically, when the current winning area is the batting order bell L, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10” with a probability of about ½ and the instruction number “11” with a probability of about ½. Further, when the current winning area is the batting order bell C, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number “10” with a probability of about 1/2, determines the instruction number “12” with a probability of about 1/2, and the batting order bell R In this case, the instruction number “11” is determined with a probability of about ½, and the instruction number “12” is determined with a probability of about ½.

  After determining the instruction number in step S106-4-3 or step S106-4-5 or step S106-4-6, the main CPU 301 stores the instruction number in the instruction number storage area. The instruction number storage area is stored in the main RAM 303, for example. The main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the instruction number stored in the instruction number storage area in the LED display process of the interrupt process described later. The main CPU 301 transmits a second command indicating the instruction number stored in the instruction number storage area in the command transmission process of the interrupt process. After storing the instruction number, the main CPU 301 ends the instruction number determination process.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart of wait processing. The main CPU 301 executes the wait process until the spinning period execution period or the wait period elapses.

  When the wait process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect number in the rotation effect number storage area is “0” (S107-1). That is, it is determined whether or not “no effect” is determined in the spinning effect determination process. When the rotation effect number is “0” (S107-1: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait timer is a numerical value “0” (S107-2). The wait timer is decremented every time an interrupt process is executed. When determining that the wait timer has not timed up (wait timer ≠ 0), the main CPU 301 repeats step S107-2 (S107-2: NO).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait timer has expired (S107-2: YES), the main CPU 301 newly sets the wait timer to an initial value (about 4100 ms) (S107-3). Further, the main CPU 301 stores a reel start command indicating that each reel 12 has been started in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S107-4), starts rotation of each reel 12, and ends the wait process.

  If the main CPU 301 determines in step S107-1 that the rotation effect number is other than “0”, the rotation effect number is “1” indicating the rotation effect A, or “ 2 ”is determined (S107-5). When it is determined that the rotation effect number is “1” or “2” (S107-5: YES), the main CPU 301 sets 1000 sm in the rotation effect timer (S107-6).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotation effect number is not “1” or “2” (S107-5: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the rotation effect number is “3” indicating the rotation effect C. It is determined whether or not (S107-7). When determining that the rotation effect number is “3” (S107-7: YES), the main CPU 301 sets 2000 sm in the rotation effect timer (S107-8). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation effect number is not “3” (S107-7: NO), that is, when the rotation effect number is “4” indicating the rotation effect D, the main CPU 301 determines the rotation effect number. 5000 sm is set in the effect timer (S107-9).

  When the main CPU 301 sets the rotation effect timer in step S107-6, step S107-8, and step S107-9, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect timer is subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S107-10). . The rotation effect timer is decremented every time the interruption process is executed. When the main CPU 301 repeats step S107-10 until the spinning effect timer expires (that is, until the spinning effect ends) (S107-10: NO), and determines that the spinning effect timer has expired (S107-10: YES), the process proceeds to step S107-2.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart of pre-stop processing. When starting the pre-stop process, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value in the acceleration wait timer (S108-1). The initial value of the acceleration weight timer is set to the length of time required for each reel 12 to accelerate to steady rotation after starting. After setting the initial value in the acceleration wait timer, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the acceleration wait timer has expired (S108-2). The main CPU 301 repeats step S108-2 until the acceleration wait timer expires (S108-2: NO). When the acceleration wait timer expires (S108-2: YES), the process proceeds to step S108-3. To do.

  In step S108-3, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “3” in the non-stop operation counter indicating the number of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R) that have not been stopped. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a display combination storage area setting process (S108-4). As described above, each displayable bit in the display combination storing area corresponds to each winning combination, and is a numerical value “1” when there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the corresponding winning combination may stop on the effective line. Therefore, in step S108-4 in which all the reels 12 are rotating, since all symbol combinations relating to all winning combinations can be stopped on the effective line, all the bits in the display combination storing area are set to the numerical value “1”. Is set.

  After the display combination storage area setting process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the priority order storage process (S108-5). FIG. 47 is a conceptual diagram of a plurality of priority storage areas P (PL, PC, PR) set in the priority storage process. As shown in FIG. 47, the priority storage area P includes a left reel priority storage area PL corresponding to the reel 12L, a middle reel priority storage area PC corresponding to the reel 12C, and a right reel priority corresponding to the reel 12R. And a rank storage area PR. Each priority storage area P is divided into a plurality (21) of areas Q. Each area Q corresponds to each symbol position (unit area U) of the reel 12.

  When the priority order storing process is executed, the priority order of the symbols of the area Q is stored in each area Q. For example, the priority “HFF” is stored in the area Q in which a winning combination that has not been won is displayed when the active line is stopped. Further, the priority “H00” is stored in the area Q of the symbol that can be stopped on the active line, and the numerical value “H01” is stored in the area Q of the symbol constituting the winning combination.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the priority order storage process. When starting the priority order storing process, the main CPU 301 stores the non-stop operation counter as the number of searches (S108-5-1). Further, the main CPU 301 determines one reel 12 among the reels 12 that have not been stopped yet as a target reel (S108-5-2).

  The main CPU 301 executes priority table selection processing (S108-5-3). The priority table defines the priority of each winning combination, and one of the plurality of priority tables is selected. For example, a game in which the winning area “batting order bells C1 to C4” (the first stop in the correct pressing order is the reel 12C) is assumed. According to the priority order table selected in the game, in the middle reel priority order storage area PC, the priority order of the “middle bell” symbol is higher than the priority order of the “upper bell” symbol. On the other hand, in the left reel priority storage area PL and the right reel priority storage area PR, the priority of the “upper bell” symbol is higher than the priority of the “middle bell” symbol. According to the above configuration, by appropriately selecting the priority order table, the symbols to be stopped on the active line change according to the stop operation order.

  After executing the priority table selection processing, the main CPU 301 stores the initial value “00” in the area pointer and the initial value “21” in the remaining area number (S108-5-4). The area pointer designates the area Q of the target reel. The remaining area number means the number of areas Q in the target reel where no priority order is stored.

  The main CPU 301 acquires a symbol code (symbol type) at the symbol position designated by the area pointer (S108-5-5). Further, the main CPU 301 determines the priority order according to the symbol code, the winning area (winning role), and the priority order table (S108-5-6). The main CPU 301 stores the determined priority order in the area Q designated by the current area pointer (S108-5-7).

  The main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the area pointer and subtracts a numerical value “1” from the remaining area number (S108-5-8). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining area number is a numerical value “0” (S108-5-9). When determining that the remaining area number is not “0” (S108-5-9: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes steps S108-5-5 to S108-5-9. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining area number is “0” (S108-5-9: YES), that is, when generation of the priority order storage area of the target reel is completed, the main CPU 301 determines “ 1 "is subtracted (S108-5-10).

  After subtracting the number of searches, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of searches has ended (S108-5-11). If it is determined that the number of searches has not ended (S108-5-11: NO), the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S108-5-2, changes the target reel, and proceeds from step S108-5-2 to step S108-5-2. Steps S108-5-11 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when determining that the number of searches has ended (S108-5-11: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the priority order storage process.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the stop control process. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 has been operated (S109-1). The main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S109-1 until the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 is operated (S109-1: NO). On the other hand, when the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 is operated (S109-1: YES), the main CPU 301 sends a stop operation command indicating the type of the stop button 25 that has been stopped to a command in the main RAM 303. Store in the storage area (S109-2).

  When the stop operation command is stored, the main CPU 301 updates the stop order storage area (S109-3). Further, the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the non-stop operation counter (S109-4). The main CPU 301 sets the reel 12 corresponding to the operated stop button 25 as a stop target reel (S109-5).

  The main CPU 301 acquires the current value of the symbol counter (that is, the symbol number located on the middle line) as the stop operation position (S109-6). The main CPU 301 determines the priority order of the area Q of the stop operation position and the area Q for four frames from the next frame of the stop operation position among the areas Q of the priority order storage area of the target reel (that is, for five frames). Is obtained (S109-7). In addition, the main CPU 301 determines the frame with the highest priority among the acquired priorities for the five frames as the planned stop position, and sets the number of frames from the stop operation position to the planned stop position as the number of sliding frames ( S109-8).

  The main CPU 301 updates each bit of the display combination storing area in accordance with the symbol code of the planned stop position (that is, the type of symbol of the planned stop position) (S109-9). For example, when the reel 12L stops in the stop control process and the symbol “bell” stops on the active line, the symbol combination related to the winning combination (for example, the winning combination “middle cherries”) whose left reel symbol is not “bell” is Since there is no possibility of stopping on the active line, the bit corresponding to the winning combination among the bits of the display combination storing area is a numerical value “0”.

  After updating the display combination storing area, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the non-stop operation counter is “0” (S109-10). That the non-stop operation counter is a numerical value “0” means that the stop operation has been performed for all the reels 12. When it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is “0” (S109-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the stop control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is not “0” (S109-10: NO), the priority order storage process executed in the pre-stop process is executed (S109-11). In step S109-11, the priority order is stored in the priority order storage area P of the rotating reel 12, as in step S109-3 of the stop pre-processing. However, even if the symbols constituting the winning combination shown in the winning area of the winning area storage area, the combination of symbols related to the winning combination that is no longer displayed on the active line due to any reel 12 being stopped. The symbol is not set higher in priority than other symbols.

  After executing the priority order storage process, the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S109-1. The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S109-1 to step 109-11 until a stop operation is performed on all the reels 12, that is, until it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is “0”. Run. When it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is “0” (S109-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the reel stop control process.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the display determination process (S110). When the display determination process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to the winning combination stopped on the active line is a symbol combination related to the winning combination permitted to stop on the active line in the game. (S110-1). Specifically, in step S110-1, the main CPU 301 grants display permission corresponding to the winning combination for the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit set to “1” among the displayable bits in the display combination storing area. It is determined whether or not the bit is set to “1”. When the display permission bit corresponding to the displayable bit of the numerical value “1” is set to “0”, the main CPU 301 determines that an illegal winning has occurred.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that an illegal winning has occurred (S110-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an illegal winning command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-2), and shifts to an illegal winning error process to play the game. Prohibit progress. When the illegal winning error process is executed, for example, the power button 511 is turned off and then turned on again, and the main CPU 301 is caused to execute the startup process and the setting change process to set a normal set value. It becomes possible to play.

  When it is determined that the symbol combination related to the winning combination permitted to stop on the active line is stopped (S110-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to replay is stopped on the active line. Determine (S110-3). When it is determined that the replay is stopped on the symbol combination effective line (S110-3: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the re-game in-operation flag to the ON state (S110-4), and the re-game command Is stored in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-5), and the display determination process is terminated. The replay command indicates that the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped on the active line.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination related to replay is not stopped on the active line (S110-3: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the re-game in-operation flag to the OFF state (S110-6), and wins a prize. It is determined whether or not the symbol combination related to the winning combination is stopped on the active line (S110-7). When it is determined that the symbol combination related to the winning combination is stopped on the active line (S110-7: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the winning combination command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S110-8). . The winning winning combination command indicates the type of symbol combination related to the winning winning combination aligned with the active line.

  The main CPU 301 adds the number of medals according to the type of symbol combination related to the winning winning combination stopped on the active line to the number of credits (S110-9). After adding the number of credits, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of addition is larger than the numerical value “50” which is the upper limit value of the number of credits (S110-10). When the number of credits is larger than “50” (S110-10: YES), the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, the numerical value “5” when the addition result of step S110-9 is “55”). ") Is set in the medal request counter (S110-11). After setting the number of medals in the medal request counter, the main CPU 301 proceeds to hopper driving processing. On the other hand, when the number of credits is “50” or less (S110-10: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the display determination process.

  If the main CPU 301 determines in step S110-7 that the symbol combination related to the winning combination has not stopped on the active line (S110-7: NO), the main CPU 301 stores the lose display command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. (S110-12). The losing display command indicates that the symbol combination related to the winning combination is not stopped on the active line. In the present embodiment, the replay command, the winning winning combination command, and the lose display command are collectively referred to as a display winning combination command.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the hopper driving process. The hopper driving process is executed when the payout request counter is set in the display determination process or the settlement operation acceptance process of the pre-game start process. When the hopper driving process is started, the main CPU 301 stores a payout start command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S120). The payout start command indicates the start of the medal discharge in the hopper 520. Further, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value in the payout period monitoring timer (S121). The payout period monitoring timer expires when a predetermined time length (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the hopper driving process.

  The main CPU 301 starts outputting a hopper drive signal (S122). In the period when the hopper driving signal is output, medals are sequentially discharged from the hopper 520. After starting the output of the hopper drive signal, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout period monitoring timer has expired (S123). When the main CPU 301 determines that the payout period monitoring timer has expired (S123: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an error command in the command storage area (S124), and proceeds to hopper empty error processing. If the discharge of the number of medals in the payout request counter is not completed between the start of the hopper driving process and the time out of the payout period monitoring timer, the main CPU 301 shifts to the hopper empty error process and prohibits the progress of the game To do. When the hopper empty error process is executed, for example, when the hopper 520 is replenished with medals and the reset button 512 is operated, the progress of the game is permitted.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not a payout signal from the hopper 520 has been detected (S125). As described above, the payout signal is output from the payout sensor 112SE each time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. The main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S125 until it is determined that a payout signal has been detected (S125: NO).

  When determining that the payout signal has been detected (S125: YES), the main CPU 301 decrements “1” in the payout request counter (S126). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout request counter has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S127). If the main CPU 301 determines that the payout request counter has been subtracted to the numerical value “0” (S127: YES), the main CPU 301 stops outputting the hopper drive signal (S128), and stores the payout end command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. (S129). For example, the sub-control board 400 starts outputting a payout sound effect when receiving a payout start command from the main CPU 301 and stops outputting a payout effect sound when receiving a payout end command. When the main CPU 301 stores the payout end command, the main CPU 301 ends the hopper driving process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout request counter is not “0” (S127: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S123 to step 127.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the game state transition process. When the game state transition process is started, the main CPU 301 executes the RT state transition process (S111-1). In the RT state transition process, the main CPU 301 transitions to the RT state. After the RT state transition process, the main CPU 301 executes a bonus state transition process (S111-2). In the bonus state transition process, the main CPU 301 ends or starts the bonus operation state. After the bonus state transition process, the main CPU 301 executes an instruction state transition process (S111-3). In the instruction state transition process, the main CPU 301 transitions the instruction state.

  FIG. 53A is a flowchart of the RT state transition process. When starting the RT state transition process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the RT1 transition symbol has stopped on the active line (S111-1-1). As described above, the RT1 transition symbol stops at the active line when the winning combination “upper bell” is missed. When it is determined that the RT1 transition symbol has stopped on the active line (S111-1-1: YES), the main CPU 301 transitions to the RT1 state (S111-1-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT1”. Note that when the RT1 transition symbol stops at the valid line in the RT1 state, the RT state is not changed. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition process.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the RT1 transition symbol is not stopped on the active line (S111-1-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the RT2 transition symbol is stopped on the active line (S111-1-3). ). When it is determined that the RT2 transition symbol has stopped on the active line (S111-1-3: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the RT state to the RT2 state (S111-1-4). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT2”. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition process.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the RT2 transition symbol is not stopped on the active line (S111-1-3: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the RT3 transition symbol is stopped on the active line (S111-1-5). ). When the main CPU 301 determines that the RT3 transition symbol has stopped on the active line (S111-1-5: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the RT state to the RT3 state (S111-1-6). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT3”. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition process.

  If the main CPU 301 determines that the RT3 transition symbol is not stopped on the active line (S111-1-5: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bonus operating state termination condition is satisfied in this game (S111). -1-7). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state has reached 297. When the main CPU 301 determines that the bonus operation state end condition is not satisfied (S111-1-7: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the gaming state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the termination condition for the bonus operation state is satisfied (S111-1-7: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the RT state to the RT0 state (S111-1-8). Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the RT flag stored in the RT state storage area of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating “RT0”. After changing the RT flag, the main CPU 301 ends the RT state transition process.

  FIG. 53B is a flowchart of the bonus state transition process. When the main CPU 301 starts the bonus state transition process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to the bonus combination on the active line is stopped (S111-2-1). When it is determined that the symbol combination related to the bonus combination on the active line is stopped (S111-2-1: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the bonus operating state (S111-2-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 turns on the bonus operation flag stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 303. The main CPU 301 ends the bonus state transition process after changing the bonus operation flag to the ON state.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination related to the bonus combination is not stopped on the active line (S111-2-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the bonus operation state end condition is satisfied in the current game. (S111-2-3). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state has reached 297. When the main CPU 301 determines that the condition for ending the bonus operation state is not satisfied (S111-2-3: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the bonus state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus operation state end condition is satisfied (S111-2-3: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the bonus operation flag to the OFF state (S111-2-4), and then the bonus state. End the migration process.

  FIG. 53C is a flowchart of the instruction state transition process. When starting the instruction state transition process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current instruction state is a normal state (S111-3-1). When determining that the current state is the normal state (S111-3-1: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the AT state is won in the current game (S111-3-2). When determining that the AT state is not won (S111-3-2: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT state is won (S111-3-2: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag of the main RAM 303 to a value indicating the start preparation state (S111-3-3). In the above configuration, when the AT state is won in the normal state, the start preparation state is entered.

When determining that the instruction state is not the normal state (S111-3-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction state is a start preparation state (S111-3-4). When the main CPU 301 determines that it is in the start preparation state (S111-3-4: YES)
Then, it is determined whether or not the current game has shifted to the RT3 state (S111-3-5). When determining that it has not shifted to the RT3 state (S111-3-5: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state transition process. On the other hand, when determining that the state has shifted to the RT3 state (S111-3-5: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag to a value indicating the AT state (S111-3-6). In the above configuration, when the RT3 state is shifted in the start preparation state, the AT state is shifted.

  When determining that the instruction state is not the start preparation state (S111-3-4: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the instruction state is an AT state (S111-3-7). When the main CPU 301 determines that it is in the AT state (S111-3-7: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the AT counter has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S111-3-8). When determining that the AT counter is not the numerical value “0” (S111-3-8: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state transition process. On the other hand, when determining that the AT counter is a numerical value “0” (S111-3-8: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag to a value indicating the end preparation state (S111-3-9). In the above configuration, when the number of remaining games (AT counter) in the AT state is subtracted to the numerical value “0”, the state shifts to the end preparation state.

  When it is determined that the instructed state is not the AT state (S111-3-7: NO), that is, in the end preparation state, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game has shifted to the RT1 state ( S111-3-10). If it is determined that the state has not shifted to the RT1 state (S111-3-10: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the instruction state transition process without shifting the instruction state. On the other hand, when determining that the state has shifted to the RT1 state (S111-3-10: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the instruction state flag to a value indicating the normal state. In the above configuration, when the transition is made to the RT1 state in the completion preparation state (when the upper and middle bells are missed), the transition is made to the normal state.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the interrupt process. As described above, the main CPU 301 executes an interrupt process every 1.49 ms during the period when the game control process is being executed.

  When starting the interrupt process, the main CPU 301 saves data in various registers (S201). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 executes an input port reading process (S202). In the input port reading process, the main CPU 301 reads various signals input to the I / F circuit 305. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads ON signals from the start switch 24SW, each stop switch 25SW, the medal sensor 34SE, the settlement switch 23SW, and the like in the input port reading process. The main CPU 301 sets the detection flag of the sensor and switch that has read the ON signal to the ON state.

  The main CPU 301 executes a timer measurement process (S203). In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts a predetermined value from various timers. In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts, for example, a payout period monitoring timer set in the hopper drive process, a spinning effect production timer set in the wait process, and a wait timer.

  The main CPU 301 selects a drive target reel from the rotating reels (S204), and executes a drive control process (S205) for the drive target reel. In the drive control process, the main CPU 301 outputs a drive pulse to the stepping motor of the drive target reel. When a drive pulse is input, the excitation pattern of the stepping motor is switched.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the drive control processing for all the reels 12 has been executed (S206). When it is determined that the drive control processing for all the reels 12 has not been executed (S206: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats step S204 and step S205. On the other hand, when it is determined that the drive control process for all the reels 12 has been executed (S206: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the external signal output process (S207).

  The main CPU 301 outputs a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1 in the external signal output process. For example, when the setting change process is started, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating the start of the setting change process to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  The main CPU 301 drives various lamps in the LED display process (S208). For example, the main CPU 301 displays the BET lamp 14 in a manner indicated by the BET lamp display data generated by the game control process. In addition, in the LED display process, the main CPU 301 turns on the re-game display lamp 18 when the re-game operating flag is set to the ON state. Further, the main CPU 301 causes the stored number display unit 17 to display the number of credits in the LED display process. Further, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the instruction number determined in the instruction number determination process in the LED display process.

  After the LED display process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to a command transmission process (S209). As described above, various commands are stored in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 in the game control process. The command stored in the command storage area is transmitted to the sub control board 400 in the command transmission process.

  After the command transmission process, the main CPU 301 executes a register restoration process (S210), and restores the data saved in step S210 to the register. When the register return process is executed, the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S of the game control process that was executed when the interrupt process was started.

<Each process executed by the sub CPU>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart of sub activation processing of the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 executes a sub activation process when a reset signal is input from the reset circuit. The reset circuit outputs a reset signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the sub-control board 400 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of the power supply voltage to the sub control board 400 is started, the sub activation process is executed.

  When the sub activation process is started, the sub CPU 412 executes an activation initialization process (S301). In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 initializes various registers of the sub control board 400, for example.

  In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether there is a backup abnormality in the sub RAM 414. If there is a backup abnormality, the sub CPU 412 initializes the backup data. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the data stored in various ROMs including the CGROM 424 is appropriate in the startup initialization process. For example, data stored at a specific address in each ROM is read to determine whether or not the data is appropriate. When an abnormality is found in various ROMs, the sub CPU 412 shifts to predetermined error processing.

  In the sub activation process, the sub CPU 412 activates the lamp control task (S302), activates the acoustic control task (S303), activates the image control board communication task (S304), activates the main control board communication task (S305), and effects. The button input task is activated (S306).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart of each task activated in the sub activation process. The sub CPU 412 controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5 and the effect lamp 28 by a lamp control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 controls the speakers (31, 32) by an acoustic control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 transmits a command to the image control board 420 by the image control board communication task, receives a command from the main control board 300 in the main control board communication task, and performs the effect button 26 and the direction in the effect button input task. The operation of the designation button 27 is accepted.

  A timer interrupt signal is input to the sub CPU 412 at predetermined time intervals. When receiving the timer interrupt signal, the sub CPU 412 executes one of the tasks. That is, each peripheral device including various lamps and speakers (31, 32) is controlled in a time division manner.

  FIG. 56A is a flowchart of a lamp control task. When starting the lamp control task, the sub CPU 412 initializes data for controlling various lamps (S302-1). When various data are initialized, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a lamp data analysis process (S302-2). The lamp data is data indicating blinking patterns of various lamps. For example, a time series (300 ms lighting → 300 ms off → 300 ms lighting →...) Of data indicating the time to turn on a specific lamp and data indicating the time to turn off a specific lamp can be adopted as the lamp data.

  In the lamp control process (S302-3), the sub CPU 412 blinks a specific lamp in a manner specified by the lamp data. The lamp data analysis process and the lamp effect execution process are repeatedly executed until a timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 56B is a flowchart of the acoustic control task. When starting the sound control task, the sub CPU 412 initializes various data for controlling the speakers (31, 32) (S303-1). When the sub CPU 412 initializes various data, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to an acoustic data analysis process (S303-2).

  In the sound control process (S303-3), the sub CPU 412 instructs the sound board 430 (the sound source IC 431) according to the result of the sound data analysis process. The sound source IC 431 reads out sound data from the sound source ROM 432 according to an instruction from the sub CPU 412, generates an sound signal from the sound data, and supplies the sound signal to the speakers (31, 32). The acoustic data analysis process and the acoustic control process are repeatedly executed until a timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 56C is a flowchart of the image control board communication process. When starting the image control board communication task, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the non-game timer has expired (S304-1). The non-game timer is timed up when the non-game state continues for a predetermined time after the previous game ends. Specifically, the non-game timer is set to an initial value when the previous game ends, and is subtracted every predetermined period during the non-game period. For example, the non-game timer is timed up when the non-game period continues for one minute after the previous game ends. The non-game timer is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that the non-game timer has expired (S304-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a demo display command transmission process (S304-2), and transmits the demo display command to the image control board 420. When receiving a demonstration display command, the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420 displays a demonstration image on the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, the sub CPU 412 turns off various lamps during a period in which the demonstration image is displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the non-game timer has not expired (S304-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 sets a command according to the effect number stored in the sub RAM 414 (S304-3). The effect number indicates the type of effect executed in the gaming machine 1, and is stored in the effect number storage area of the sub RAM 414 in the effect lottery process described later. The sub CPU 447 transmits the command set in step S304-3 to the image control board 420 (S304-4), and ends the image control board communication task. The image control board communication task may receive a command from the image control board 420.

  FIG. 56D is a flowchart of the main control board communication task. When the main control board communication task is started, the sub CPU 412 executes communication start pre-processing (S305-1) for initializing a predetermined storage area. After executing the pre-communication start process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a received command check process (S305-2). In the received command check process, the content of the command received from the main control board 300 is checked.

  The sub CPU 412 determines whether the command checked in the current received command check process is different from the command checked in the previous received command check process (S305-3). That is, in step S305-3, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the command from the main control board 300 has changed. The sub CPU 412 repeatedly executes step S305-3 until the command from the main control board 300 changes (S305-3: NO). When the command from the main control board 300 changes (S305-3: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to command analysis processing (S305-4).

  After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process (S305-5). In the game information update process, the sub CPU 412 updates the game information stored in the sub RAM 414 in accordance with the command received from the main control board 300. In step S305-5, the sub CPU 412 executes one of a plurality of types of game information update processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process corresponding to the type of command received from the main control board 300 among a plurality of types of game information update processes. For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives a start operation command, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process for updating the number of remaining games in the AT state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. After updating the game information, the sub CPU 412 returns the process to step S305-2, and repeats the process from step S305-2 to step S305-5 until the next timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart of command analysis processing. When starting the command analysis process, the sub CPU 412 executes an effect control process (S401). As will be described later, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect to be executed by the gaming machine 1, for example, in the effect control process.

  After executing the effect control process, the sub CPU 412 determines lamp data corresponding to the effect (S402), and stores the lamp data in the sub RAM 414 (S403). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines acoustic data according to the effect determined by the effect control process (S404), and stores the determined sound data in the sub RAM 414 (S405). When the acoustic data is stored, the sub CPU 412 ends the command analysis process.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the effect control process. When starting the effect control process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1). If it is determined that the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to setting change start / end processing (S401-2).

  Specifically, when it is determined that a setting change start command has been received, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the setting change process is being executed. For example, the sub CPU 412 displays a message “setting is being changed” on the liquid crystal display device 30 and causes each speaker to output the sound of the message. If it is determined that a setting value command has been received (that is, when the setting change process is completed), the sub CPU 412 stores the setting value indicated by the setting value command in the sub RAM 414 and ends the notification of the setting change process. To do. After executing the setting change start / end process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control board 300 is not a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the input command has been received (S401-3). ). If it is determined that the input command has been received (S401-3: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a process at the time of receiving the input command (S401-4). In the insertion command reception process, the sub CPU 412 generates an effect when a medal is inserted, for example. After executing the process at the time of receiving the insertion command, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not the input command (S401-3: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a settlement operation command has been received (S401-5). If it is determined that a settlement operation command has been received (S401-5: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a settlement operation command reception process (S401-6). In the settlement operation command reception process, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the medal settlement is being executed. The sub CPU 412 displays, for example, a message “Checkout in progress” on the liquid crystal display device 30 and outputs a predetermined warning sound from the speaker in the process when the payment operation command is received. After executing the payment operation command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a settlement operation command (S401-5: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a start operation command has been received (S401-7). If it is determined that the start operation command has been received (S401-7: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the start operation time process (S401-8). In the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 executes various processes including an effect lottery process. After executing the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When determining that the received command is not a start operation command (S401-7: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a reel start command has been received (S401-9). If it is determined that a reel start command has been received (S401-9: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a reel start command reception process (S401-10). In the reel start command reception process, for example, the sub CPU 412 causes the speaker to output a reel rotation sound that is output when the rotation of the reel is started. After executing the reel start command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When determining that the received command is not a reel start command (S401-9: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a stop operation command has been received (S401-11). If it is determined that a stop operation command has been received (S401-11: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a stop operation process (S401-12). In the stop operation processing, for example, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 30 is switched. After executing the stop operation time process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a stop operation acceptance command (S401-11: NO), whether or not a display winning combination command (re-game command, winning winning combination command or lose display command) has been received. Is determined (S401-13). If it is determined that the display winning combination command has been received (S401-13: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a display winning combination command reception process (S401-14).

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a display winning combination command (S401-13: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a payout start command or a payout end command has been received (S401-15). If it is determined that a payout start command or payout end command has been received (S401-15: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a payout sound control process (S401-16). For example, when receiving a payout start command, the sub CPU 412 starts outputting a medal payout sound for notifying medal discharge. When the payout end command is received, the sub CPU 412 stops the medal payout sound. After executing the payout sound control process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  FIG. 59A is a flowchart of the start operation time process. When the start operation time process is started, the sub CPU 412 executes an effect lottery process (S501). In the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect based on the effect lottery table. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 acquires a lottery value of each effect from the effect lottery table according to the winning area (first command), and subtracts the lottery value from the random value R4. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect in which the result of subtraction to the random value R4 is a negative number. Subsequent to the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to an instruction effect determination process (S502). In the instruction effect determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effects (A to E).

  Sub CPU412 stores the effect command according to the effect determined by the effect lottery process of this start operation time process and the instruction effect determined by the instruction effect determination process in the command storage area of sub RAM 414 after the instruction effect determination process. (S503). When receiving the effect command, the image control CPU 421 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute both the effect specified by the effect command and the instruction effect in parallel. In the above case, both the instruction graphic image S (X, Y, Z, A, B) of the above-described instruction effect and the images of other effects are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in parallel.

  FIG. 59B is a flowchart of the instruction effect determination process. When the instruction effect determination process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the instruction state is an AT state or a start preparation state (S502-1). If it is determined that it is in the AT state or the start preparation state (S502-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the first command of this game is “A04” (batting order bell) (S502). -2). If it is determined that the command is “A04” (S502-2: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the bell instruction effect selection process (S502-3). In the above configuration, the bell instruction effect selection process proceeds when the batting order bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. The sub CPU 412 ends the instruction effect determination process after the bell instruction effect selection process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the AT state or the start preparation state (S502-1: NO), or when it is determined that the first command of this game is not “A04” (S502-2: NO), The sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect according to the first command and the second command. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the instruction effect based on the instruction effect determination table (A, C) corresponding to the instruction state. For example, when the first command is “A01” (batting order replay) and the second command is “B01” and the instruction state is the AT state or the start preparation state, the instruction effect determination table A indicates the instruction effect A1. Is determined. In the present embodiment, when the second command is “B99” (no instruction), the instruction effect is not determined. After determining the instruction effect, the sub CPU 412 ends the instruction effect determination process.

  FIG. 59C is a flowchart of the bell instruction effect selection process. As described above, when the batting order bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the sub CPU 412 executes a bell instruction effect selection process. When the bell instruction effect selection process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the AT state is won in this game (S502-3-1).

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the AT state has been won (S502-3-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 selects the instruction effect C with a probability of about 9/10 and selects the instruction effect D with a probability of about 1/10 (S502). -3-2). On the other hand, if it is determined that the AT state is not won (S502-3-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 selects the instruction effect C with a probability of about 99/100 and the instruction effect D with a probability of about 1/100. Select (S502-3-3). In the above configuration, in the game in which the batting order bell in the AT state or the start preparation state is won, the instruction effect D is more easily selected when the AT state is won than when the AT state is not won. Therefore, the instruction effect D notifies the chance of winning the AT state. As described above, the bell instruction effect selection process is executed in the AT state (AT state, start preparation state), and when the AT determination process is won in the AT state, an AT stock counter is added. Therefore, it can be said that the instruction effect D notifies the chance that the right to shift to the AT state is stocked. After selecting the instruction effect, the sub CPU 412 ends the bell instruction effect selection process.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In addition, about the element in which an effect | action and a function are equivalent to 1st Embodiment in each form illustrated below, the code | symbol referred by description of 1st Embodiment is diverted, and each detailed description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In the first embodiment described above, instruction information corresponding to the stop operation order is displayed on the instruction display 16 to instruct the player about the stop operation order. The following second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the instruction information corresponding to the winning area is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the stop operation order is instructed to the player.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the instruction information according to the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information on the instruction display 16 in each game in the start preparation state and the AT state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information corresponding to the winning area of the current game. As the instruction information corresponding to the winning area, a winning area number (see FIG. 9) indicating the winning area can be adopted. For example, the winning area number of the batting order replay X1 is a numerical value “01”. The instruction information of the present embodiment corresponds to the winning area. Further, the winning area (for example, batting order replay X1) corresponds to one or more winning combinations (for example, normal replay and RT2 transition replay) (see FIG. 10). Therefore, it can be said that the instruction information corresponds to the winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the batting order replay X1 is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information “01” on the instruction display 16. According to the above configuration, the player is notified of winning of the batting order replay X1 by the instruction information. In other words, in the second embodiment, the type of batting order replay X (1-6) won in the current game is notified by the instruction information. As described above, when the batting order replay X1 is won, the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay is the “left middle right” stop operation order. Therefore, when the instruction information “01” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in the order of “left middle right”. As understood from the above description, the stop operation order “left middle right” is substantially instructed by displaying the instruction information “01” indicating the winning area number.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, when the batting order replay X2 (winning area number “02”) is won, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “02” on the instruction display 16. Display. According to the above configuration, the correct pressing order “right and left middle” of the RT2 transition replay when the batting order replay X2 is won is instructed. In addition, when each batting order replay X3 (winning area number “03”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the instruction information “03” is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the batting order replay X3 is won. The correct answer push order “middle left and right” of the RT2 transition replay is instructed. Similarly, when the batting order replay X4 (winning area number “04”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the instruction information “04” is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the batting order replay X4 is won. When the correct push order “middle right / left” of the RT2 transition replay is instructed and the batting order replay X5 (winning area number “05”) is won, the instruction information “05” is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the batting order replay is performed. When X5 is won, the correct answer push order “right and left middle” of RT2 transition replay is instructed, and when batting order replay X6 (winning area number “06”) is won, instruction information “06” is displayed on the instruction display 16. The correct answer push order “right middle left” of the RT2 transition replay when the batting order replay X6 is won is instructed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, when the batting order replay Y1 (winning area number “07”) is won, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information “07” on the instruction display 16. Display. In addition, when each batting order replay Y2 (winning area number “08”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, the instruction information “08” is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the batting order replay Y2 (winning area) When the number “09”) is won, the instruction information “09” is displayed on the instruction display 16. According to the above configuration, the type of batting order replay Y (1-3) won in the current game is notified by the instruction information. When the instruction information “07” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in the correct pressing order “left first stop” of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y1 is won. In addition, when the instruction information “08” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in the correct answer pressing order “medium first stop” of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y2 is won, and the instruction information “09” is displayed. If it is, the stop operation is performed in the correct push order “first right stop” of the RT3 transition replay when the batting order replay Y3 is won. That is, by displaying the instruction information “07” to “09” on the instruction display 16, the correct answer pressing order of the RT3 transition replay of the batting order replay Y (1 to 3) is instructed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the batting order bell L1 (winning area number “12”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16. The correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell L1 is won is the first stop on the left. Therefore, when the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the first left stop. Also, in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, when the batting order bell L2 (winning area number “13”) is won, the instruction information “13” is displayed on the instruction display 16. The correct pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell L2 is won is the first stop on the left as in the case where the batting order bell L1 is won. Therefore, when the instruction information “13” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the first left stop. Further, when the batting order bell L3 (winning area number “14”) is won, the instruction information “14” is displayed on the instruction display 16, and when the batting order bell L4 (winning area number “15”) is won, the instruction information “15” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Since the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell when the batting order bell L3 is won and the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell when the hitting bell L4 is won are both the first stop on the left, the instruction information “14” or the instruction When the information “15” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation at the first left stop. As understood from the above description, each of the instruction information “12” to “15” instructs the stop operation sequence of the first left stop.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the batting order bell C1 (winning area number “16”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, instruction information “16” is displayed on the instruction display 16. In addition, in each game in the start preparation state or the AT state, when the batting order bell C2 (winning area number “17”) is won, the instruction information “17” is displayed, and the batting order bell C3 (winning area number “18”). In the case where is won, the instruction information “18” is displayed, and when the batting order bell C4 (winning area number “19”) is won, the instruction information “19” is displayed. When the batting order bell C1, the batting order bell C2, the batting order bell C3 or the batting order bell C4 is won, the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is the middle first stop. Therefore, when any of the instruction information “16” to “19” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the middle first stop. That is, each of the instruction information “16” to “19” instructs the stop operation sequence of the middle first stop.

  Similarly, when the batting order bell R1 (winning area number “20”) is won in each game in the start preparation state or in the AT state, the instruction information “20” is displayed on the instruction display 16 and the batting order bell R2 (winning place number R2) When the area number “21” is won, the instruction information “21” is displayed, and when the batting order bell R3 (winning area number “22”) is won, the instruction information “22” is displayed and the batting order bell R4 (winning order) When the area number “23”) is won, the instruction information “23” is displayed. When the batting order bell R1, the batting order bell R2, the batting order bell R3, or the batting order bell R4 is won, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is the first stop on the right. Therefore, when any of the instruction information “20” to “23” is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs a stop operation at the first right stop. That is, each of the instruction information “20” to “23” instructs the stop operation order of the first right stop. In the second embodiment described above, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Third Embodiment>
FIG. 61A and FIG. 61B are time charts for explaining the display at each time point on the indication display 16 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when the batting order bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is instructed by the instruction information of the instruction display 16. . In the third embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the winning area number is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information (see FIG. 60).

  FIG. 61A shows a specific example when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 61A, when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the winning area number “12” of the batting order bell L1 is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information. In the above case, since the correct pressing order of the batting order bell L1 is the first left stop, the player performs the stop operation at the first left stop. In the specific example of FIG. 61A, it is assumed that the batting order bell L1 is won and the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In the above case, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, the instruction display 16 continuously displays the instruction information “12” until the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line, the instruction display 16 sequentially displays the numbers “0” to “9” (the number of payouts for the middle bell) in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 61 (b) is a specific example when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 61 (a). However, the above-described specific example of FIG. 61A assumes a case where the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (first left stop), whereas the specific example of FIG. It is assumed that the stop operation is performed at (medium first stop, right first stop).

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the batting order bell L 1 is won, the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Thereafter, when the first stop operation other than the left stop button 25L is performed, the display of the instruction information ends immediately after the first stop operation. Although illustration is omitted, when instruction information other than the instruction information “12” in FIG. 61 (b) is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed outside the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information, As in the specific example of FIG. 61 (b), the instruction display 16 ends the display of instruction information.

  As described above, the main CPU 301 according to the third embodiment is a case where the instruction display 16 displays instruction information, and the stop button 25 is operated (operation error in stop operation) other than the operation mode indicated by the instruction information. If so, the display of the instruction information displayed on the instruction display 16 is terminated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 turns off all segments of the instruction display 16 when the player makes a stop operation mistake. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the instruction display 16 is maintained in a non-display state until a symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed after a stop operation error is made. Thereafter, when the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts of the current game is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  In the third embodiment described above, the same effects as in the second embodiment can be obtained. Moreover, in 3rd Embodiment, when a stop operation mistake is made, the display of the instruction | indication indicator 16 is complete | finished. According to the above configuration, the player can recognize a stop operation error by terminating the display on the instruction display 16. A configuration is assumed in which information for notifying a stop operation error (for example, operation error information in the first embodiment) is displayed on the instruction display 16. In the above configuration, it is necessary to store lamp data for displaying information for notifying a stop operation error in the sub ROM 413 or the like. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the stop operation error is made, the display on the instruction display 16 is terminated, so that it is not necessary to store the lamp data. Therefore, according to the third embodiment, there is an advantage that the capacity of the lamp data is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the information for informing the stop operation error is displayed.

<Fourth embodiment>
62 (a) and 62 (b) are time charts for explaining the display at each time point on the indication display 16 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, when the batting order bell is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is instructed by the instruction information of the instruction display 16. . In the fourth embodiment, the winning area number is displayed as instruction information on the instruction display 16 as in the third and second embodiments described above (see FIG. 60).

  FIG. 62A shows a specific example when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state. As shown in FIG. 62A, when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, the winning area number “12” of the batting order bell L1 is displayed on the instruction display 16 as instruction information. In the specific example of FIG. 62A, it is assumed that the batting order bell L1 is won and the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In the above case, the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, the instruction display 16 continuously displays the instruction information “12” until the middle bell is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a specific example when the batting order bell L1 is won in the AT state or the start preparation state, as in FIG. 62 (a). However, the above-described specific example of FIG. 62A assumes the case where the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (first left stop), whereas the specific example of FIG. It is assumed that the stop operation is performed at (medium first stop, right first stop).

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the batting order bell L 1 is won, the instruction information “12” is displayed on the instruction display 16. Thereafter, the instruction information “12” is continuously displayed even when the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 25L. Although illustration is omitted, when instruction information other than the instruction information “12” in FIG. 62B is displayed, even when the stop operation is performed outside the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information. As in the specific example of FIG. 62B, the instruction display 16 continues to display the instruction information. As described above, when the instruction display 16 displays instruction information, the main CPU 301 according to the fourth embodiment can operate even when the stop button 25 is operated in a manner other than the operation mode indicated by the instruction information. The display of the instruction information displayed on the instruction display 16 is continued. Thereafter, when the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts of the current game is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  By the way, even in the game where the batting order bell is won, even if the first stop operation is performed in the order of pressing, the upper bell is stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the stop operation positions of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. It is possible. Although the details will be described below, the stop operation position where the upper bell can be pulled in varies depending on the type of the upper bell (upper bell 1 to upper bell 8) (the pull-in range is different for each upper bell). Further, when the winning area number is displayed, the player may be able to identify the type of the upper bell that has been won in duplicate with the middle bell in addition to the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell. That is, in the configuration in which the winning area number is displayed, the stop operation position at which the upper bell can be pulled in is notified in addition to the correct pressing order of the middle bell.

  62 (c-1) to 62 (c-4) are diagrams for explaining a stop operation position for stopping and displaying the upper bell. FIG. 62 (c-1) to FIG. 62 (c-4) assume a case where the batting order bell L1 is won and the stop operation is performed in the lost push order. When the batting order bell L1 is won, the upper bell 1 and the upper bell 4 are won in addition to the middle bell (see FIG. 10). Therefore, in the game in which the hitting bell L1 has been won, even if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing, the upper bell 1 “Replay X-Plum-Plum” or the upper bell 4 “Replay X-White BAR” depending on the stop operation position. -"White BAR" is stopped on the active line.

  FIG. 62 (c-1) and FIG. 62 (c-2) are diagrams for explaining a symbol that stops at the active line when the first stop is made in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won. In the game where the batting order bell L1 is won, when the middle stop is made, the middle symbol (plum symbol) of the upper bell 1 or the middle symbol (white BAR symbol) of the upper bell 2 is the middle bell on the effective line of the middle reel 12C. Is stopped and displayed in preference to the middle symbol (bell symbol). Specifically, in the game where the batting order bell L1 is won, the middle reel 12C is moved to the symbol position “0 to 11” or the symbol position “17 to 20” (hereinafter, symbol position “12”). In other words, the plum symbol stops at the active line of the middle reel 12C. In this embodiment, the plum pattern of the middle reel 12C stops at the effective line at the middle first stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the right reel 12R are fluctuating is changed to the stop type A (FIG. 62). (C-1)). On the other hand, in the game where the batting order bell L1 is won, when the middle stop is performed and the stop operation is performed at the symbol position “12 to 16”, the white BAR symbol stops on the effective line of the middle reel 12C. In the present embodiment, the white BAR symbol of the middle reel 12C stops at the effective line at the middle first stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the right reel 12R fluctuate is set to the stop type B (FIG. 62 (c-2)).

  FIG. 62 (c-1) is a view for explaining a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line from the stop form A. FIG. In the game where the hitting bell L1 is won and the reel 12C stops in the stop form A, the upper bell 1 “Replay X-Plum-Plum” can be stopped and displayed depending on the stop operation position of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. It is. On the other hand, the middle bell “Bell-Bell-Bell” and the upper bell 4 “Replay X-White BAR-White BAR” won in duplicate with the upper bell 1 cannot be stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the stop type A, the left reel 12L is stopped in the replay X symbol drawing range (other than symbol positions “3 to 7”), and the right reel 12R is pulled in the plum symbol drawing range (symbol position). When the stop operation is performed at other than “15-19”, the upper bell 1 is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  FIG. 62 (c-2) is a view for explaining a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line from the stop type B. FIG. In the game in which the hitting bell L1 is won and the reel 12C stops in the stop type B, the upper bell 4 can be stopped and displayed by the stop operation position of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. On the other hand, the middle bell and the upper bell 1 won in duplicate with the upper bell 4 cannot be stopped. Specifically, in the case of the stop type B, the left reel 12L is stopped at the stop operation position where the replay X symbol can be drawn, and the right reel 12R is stopped at the stop operation position where the white BAR symbol can be drawn (the symbol position “ 15-19 "), the upper bell 4 is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  FIGS. 62 (c-3) and 62 (c-4) are diagrams for explaining the winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game where the batting order bell L1 has been won when the right first stop is made. . In the game where the batting order bell L1 is won, when the first stop on the right is made, the right symbol (plum symbol) of the upper bell 1 or the right symbol (white BAR symbol) of the upper bell 4 is the middle bell on the effective line of the right reel 12R. Is stopped and displayed in preference to the right symbol (bell symbol). Specifically, in the game in which the batting order bell L1 is won, when the right reel 12R is stopped at a position other than the symbol positions “15 to 19” when the right reel 12R is stopped, the plumb is placed on the effective line of the right reel 12R. The symbol stops. In the present embodiment, the plum pattern of the right reel 12R stops at the effective line at the first right stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the middle reel 12C fluctuate is set to the stop type C (FIG. 62). (C-3)). On the other hand, in the game where the batting order bell L1 is won, the white BAR symbol stops on the effective line of the right reel 12R when the first right stop is made and the stop operation is performed at the symbol position “15-19”. In this embodiment, the white BAR symbol of the right reel 12R stops at the effective line at the first right stop, and the display mode of each reel 12 in which the left reel 12L and the middle reel 12C are fluctuating is changed to the stop type D (FIG. 62 (c-4)).

  FIG. 62 (c-3) is a diagram for explaining a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line from the stop type C. FIG. When the right reel 12R stops in the stop type C, the upper bell 1 “Replay X-Plum-Plum” can be stopped and displayed according to the stop operation positions of the second stop operation and the third stop operation, and the middle bell “Bell- "Bell-bell" and upper bell 4 "Replay X-white BAR-white BAR" cannot be stopped. Specifically, in the case of the stop type C, the left reel 12L is stopped at the stop operation position where the replay X symbol can be drawn, and the middle reel 12C is stopped at the stop operation position where the plum symbol can be drawn (the symbol position “12”). When the stop operation is performed in a manner other than ˜16 ”, the upper bell 1 is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  FIG. 62 (c-2) is a view for explaining a winning combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line from the stop form D. FIG. When the right reel 12R stops in the stop form D, the upper bell 4 can be stopped and displayed by the stop operation positions of the second stop operation and the third stop operation, and the middle bell and the upper bell 1 cannot be stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the stop type D, the left reel 12L is stopped at the stop operation position where the replay X symbol can be drawn, and the middle reel 12C is stopped at the stop operation position where the white BAR symbol can be drawn (the symbol position “ 12-16 "), the upper bell 4 is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  As described above, when the batting order bell L1 is won, two types of upper bells (1, 4) can be stopped and displayed in addition to the middle bell. In addition, when the batting order bell L1 is won, when the left stop operation other than the first left stop operation is performed, stop types A to D are displayed, and one of the two types of upper bells can be stopped and displayed. In the fourth embodiment, since the winning area number is notified, the player can identify the two types of upper bells that are won. Therefore, the player discriminates from the displayed stop type the upper bell that can be stopped and displayed in the current game (upper bell 1 for stop type A or stop type C, upper bell 4 for stop type B or stop type D). By stopping the remaining reels 12 at an appropriate stop operation position, the upper bell can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, when any of the batting order bell L2 to the batting order bell L4 is won, when any of the batting order bell C1 to the batting order bell C2 is won, and from the batting order bell R1 to the batting order bell R2 If either wins, two types of upper bells win in duplicate with the middle bell. In the case described above, even if the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle-level bell being lost, the upper-level bell won in the current game can be identified from the instruction information in the same manner as when the batting order bell L1 is won. Therefore, the upper bell can be stopped and displayed on the active line by stopping each reel at the stop operation position where the upper bell won in the current game is stopped and displayed.

  As understood from the above description, the instruction information (winning area number) of the present embodiment indicates the correct pressing order of the middle bell and the stop operation position where the upper bell can be pulled. Assume that in the game in which the hitting bell is won, the instruction information is not displayed when the first stop operation is performed in the order of pushing the loss. In the above configuration, the player cannot confirm the type of the won upper bell by the instruction information in the period after the first stop operation. In the present embodiment, as described above, the instruction information is continuously displayed even when the first stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the loss. Therefore, in the period after the first stop operation, the type of the winning upper bell can be confirmed by the instruction information. That is, in the period after the first stop operation, the stop operation position where the upper bell can be retracted can be confirmed from the instruction information. In the fourth embodiment, other than the winning area number may be adopted as the instruction information. For example, as in the first embodiment, information corresponding to a specific stop operation mode may be adopted as the instruction information.

<Fifth Embodiment>
FIG. 63A is a timing chart for explaining a period in which the instruction information is displayed and a period in which the instruction effect is executed in the fifth embodiment. In the first embodiment described above, the instruction information display start point PA and the instruction effect start point PB are substantially simultaneous. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the display of the instruction information is started at a time different from the time when the instruction effect is started. Specifically, the main CPU 301 of the fifth embodiment starts displaying instruction information at a time before the time when the instruction effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, when a game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command to the sub CPU 412. When the second command is received, the sub CPU 412 immediately causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute the instruction effect. In the above configuration, the instruction effect start time PB3 is immediately after the game start operation.

  On the other hand, the instruction information display start time point PA3 is a time point (or immediately before) when a specific period has elapsed since the game start operation was performed. In the above configuration, the instruction effect start time point PB3 precedes the instruction information display start time point PA3. For example, an acceleration period may be employed as the specific period described above. In the above configuration, the instruction information display start time point PA3 is substantially simultaneously with the start time of the stop operation reception period. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the execution period of a spinning effect as the above-mentioned specific period. In the above configuration, the display of the instruction information is started substantially simultaneously with the game start operation, and then the instruction effect is executed substantially simultaneously with the end point of the spinning effect.

  By the way, when the stop operation mode is instructed by both the instruction information and the instruction effect, it may be preferable to focus one on the other. For example, when the performance of the instruction effect is superior to the instruction information, it is better to focus on the instruction effect than the instruction information. In addition, when the stop operation mode is instructed by both the instruction information and the instruction effect, there is a situation in which one of the stop operation modes is first noticed more easily than the other.

  The instruction effect of the fifth embodiment is executed by the liquid crystal display device 30 as in the first embodiment. The instruction information is displayed on an instruction display 16 that is a 7-segment display. The instruction effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 has higher performance than the instruction information displayed on the 7-segment display. Considering the above circumstances, in the fifth embodiment, the instruction effect is displayed prior to the instruction information. According to the above configuration, the instruction effect with high performance is more likely to be noticed than the instruction information.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, as an example of a configuration in which the display start time of the instruction information is different from the start time of the instruction effect, the configuration in which the instruction effect starts at a time before the display of the instruction information is started. showed that. However, the display of the instruction information may be started at a time before the instruction effect is started.

  FIG. 63B is a diagram for describing a specific example in which the display of the instruction information starts at a time before the start of the instruction effect. In the above specific example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when a game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits the second command to the sub CPU 412. Further, the main CPU 301 displays the instruction information on the instruction display 16 immediately after transmitting the second command. In the above configuration, the instruction information display start point PA4 is immediately after the game start operation. Note that the second command may be transmitted immediately after the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  On the other hand, the start time PB4 of the instruction effect is a time when a specific period has elapsed (or just before it elapses) after the game start operation is performed. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 63B, the instruction information display start time point PA4 precedes the instruction effect start time point PB4. As the above-mentioned specific period, for example, a wait period or an acceleration period can be adopted. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the execution period of a spinning effect as the above-mentioned specific period. In the specific example of FIG. 63 (b) above, the instruction information is displayed prior to the instruction effect. For example, the instruction information is more likely to be noticed compared to a configuration in which the instruction information is displayed after the instruction effect. Become.

  According to the above 5th Embodiment, there can exist an effect similar to 1st Embodiment. Further, according to the fifth embodiment, the instruction information display start time point PA and the instruction effect start time point PB are different from each other, so that one of the preceding display items (the instruction effect or the instruction information) is easily noticed. . It should be noted that the case where the instruction effect precedes the instruction information (FIG. 63A) and the case where the instruction information precedes the instruction effect (FIG. 63B) may be appropriately selected. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the case where instruction information precedes instruction effect, and the case where instruction effect and instruction information are displayed substantially simultaneously (FIG. 31 of 1st Embodiment) are selected suitably, The case where the instruction information is preceded and the case where the instruction effect and the instruction information are displayed substantially simultaneously may be appropriately selected.

<Sixth Embodiment>
FIG. 64A is a diagram for explaining an instruction display 70 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 64A shows the front door 3 with a region outside the periphery of the panel 10 omitted. As shown in FIG. 64A, the panel 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an instruction display 70 is provided. The panel 10 of the sixth embodiment is provided with a payout number display 80 instead of the instruction display 16. Furthermore, the panel 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the stop operation order display lamp 29 (29L, 29C, 29R) is omitted.

  The instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment is common to the instruction display 16 of the first embodiment in that the instruction information is displayed in the instruction display period TS (see FIG. 20). However, the instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment is different from the instruction display 16 of the first embodiment in that it does not display the number of payouts of the current game in the payout display period TH (see FIG. 20). The number of payouts for the current game is displayed on the payout number display unit 80. Further, the instruction display 70 displays the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state. As described above, the bonus operating state ends when the total number of medals paid out reaches 297. Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of medals that can be acquired in the bonus operating state by the instruction display 70.

  As shown to Fig.64 (a), the instruction | indication indicator 70 is comprised including the some display area 71 (L, C, R). Each display area 71 includes a left display area 71L, a middle display area 71C, and a right display area 71R. Each display area 71 is configured by, for example, a 7-segment display. The left display area 71L displays hundreds of medals paid out in the bonus operating state. The middle display area 71C displays the tenth place of the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state, and the right display area 71R displays the first place of the total number of medals. For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, when the bonus combination “Red Seven-Red Seven-Red Seven” is stopped and displayed on the active line, the right display area 71R displays the number “0”. When the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operation state is 9 or less, the middle display area 71C is not displayed (all segments are turned off), and when the total number of medals is 99 or less, the left display The area 71L is not displayed.

  As described above, the instruction display 70 displays instruction information in the AT state. The instruction information of the sixth embodiment is, for example, three numbers. Specifically, in the AT state, the left display area 71L instructs the timing (order) of the stop operation of the left stop button 25L among the stop buttons 25. For example, when the first stop operation of the left stop button 25L is instructed, the left display area 71L displays the number “1”. The left display area 71L displays the number “2” when the second stop operation of the left stop button 25L is instructed, and the number “3” when the third stop operation of the left stop button 25L is instructed. Is displayed. Further, the middle display area 71 </ b> C instructs the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop button 25 </ b> C among the stop buttons 25. For example, when the first stop operation of the middle stop button 25C is instructed, the middle display area 71C displays the number “1”. The middle display area 71C displays the number “2” when the second stop operation of the middle stop button 25C is instructed, and the number “3” when the third stop operation of the middle stop button 25C is instructed. Is displayed. Similarly, the right display area 71R indicates the timing of the stop operation of the right stop button 25R among the stop buttons. For example, when the first stop operation of the right stop button 25R is instructed, the number “1” is displayed, and when the second stop operation of the right stop button 25R is instructed, the number “2” is displayed and the right stop is displayed. When the third stop operation of the button 25R is instructed, the number “3” is displayed.

  In the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed, the number “1” is displayed in the left display area 71L, the number “2” is displayed in the middle display area 71C, and the right display area 71R. The number “3” is displayed. That is, when the stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed, the instruction display 70 describes the numeric string “1, 2, 3” (hereinafter referred to as instruction information “1, 2, 3”) as instruction information. ) Is displayed. Similarly, when the stop operation order “middle left and right” is instructed, the instruction information “1, 3, 2” is displayed. When the stop operation order “middle left and right” is instructed, the instruction information “2, 1, 3” is displayed. When the stop operation order “middle right / left” is indicated, the instruction information “3, 1, 2” is displayed. When the stop operation order “middle right / left” is indicated, the instruction information “2, 3, 1” is displayed. When the stop operation order “right middle left” is indicated, the instruction information “3, 2, 1” is displayed. In addition, when the first left stop is instructed in the stop operation order, the number “1” is displayed in the left display area 71L, and the number is not displayed in the other display areas 71 (C, R). Specifically, among the three segments arranged in parallel in the vertical direction of the display area (seven segments), the middle segment is turned on and the other segments are turned off. That is, the symbol “-” (hyphen) is displayed in each display area 71 where the number “1” is not displayed. In the above configuration, when the first left stop is instructed, the instruction display 70 displays the instruction information “1,-,-”. Further, the instruction display 70 displays the instruction information “−1, 1, −” when the middle first stop is instructed, and the instruction information “−, −1,” when the first right stop is instructed. Is displayed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the order for stopping the left stop button 25L, the order for stopping the middle stop button 25C, and the order for stopping the right stop button 25R are displayed on the instruction display 70. Therefore, it is easier to intuitively understand the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information, compared to a configuration in which the stop operation order of each stop button 25 is not displayed (for example, the first embodiment described above). However, in 6th Embodiment, it is good also as a structure where the order which stops operation of each stop button 25 is not displayed.

  FIG. 64B is a time chart for explaining the instruction display period TS of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 64C is a time chart for explaining the proportional instruction display period TS. The comparative instruction display displays both the number of payouts and instruction information for each game, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the proportional instruction indicator displays the instruction information in the instruction display period TS from the start time PX to the end time PY of the game. In addition, the payout number is displayed in the payout display period TH from the game end time PY to the time PZ when the bet medal for the next game is set. In the above comparison, in the AT state, the instruction display period TS starts when the current game start operation is performed, and the payout display period TH starts when the current game ends. Thereafter, when the next game start operation is performed, the instruction display period TS is started, and when the game is ended, the payout display period TH is started. That is, the proportional instruction display alternately displays the instruction information and the number of payouts as shown in FIG. However, in the configuration in which the instruction information and the payout number are displayed alternately, there is a problem that the player may easily confuse the instruction information and the payout number.

  In consideration of the above circumstances, the instruction display 70 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the instruction information and other information are not displayed alternately. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64B, the instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment displays the instruction information in the instruction display period TS (similar to the comparison). However, the instruction display 70 of the sixth embodiment does not display the payout number in the payout display period TH. In the sixth embodiment, the payout number of each game is displayed by the payout number display unit 80 in the payout display period TH. The instruction display 70 does not display other information during the period from the current instruction display period TS to the next instruction display period TS (except when an error occurs). As shown in FIG. 64B, the instruction display 70 displays the total number of medals paid out in the bonus operating state in the bonus operating state.

  In the above sixth embodiment, since the instruction information and the payout number are not displayed alternately, inconvenience of confusion between the instruction information and the payout number is suppressed. However, in the sixth embodiment, the instruction information and other information (including the payout number) may be alternately displayed. For example, the total number of medals acquired in the AT state may be displayed in the period between the current instruction display period TS and the next instruction display period TS. In the sixth embodiment, the stop operation order display lamp 29 is omitted from the panel 10, but both the instruction display 70 and the stop operation order display lamp 29 may be provided. In the above configuration, the stop operation mode may be instructed by both the instruction display 70 and the stop operation order display lamp 29.

<Seventh embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, specific examples in which the stop operation order is instructed by the instruction information have been shown. In the seventh embodiment described below, the stop operation position is indicated by the instruction information.

  Fig.65 (a) is a conceptual diagram of the symbol arrangement table of 7th Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the left reel 12L of the seventh embodiment, a black BAR symbol is arranged at the symbol position “16”, a black cherry symbol is arranged at the symbol position “19”, and the symbol position “ A white cherry symbol is arranged at the symbol position “05”, and a red cherry symbol is arranged at the symbol position “05”. Although not shown, in the seventh embodiment, the replay (X, Y) symbols of each reel 12 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less, as in the first embodiment. Further, each bell symbol (including star bell symbol) of each reel 12 is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less.

  FIG. 65B is a conceptual diagram of the winning combination defining table of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RT3 transition replay includes “Replay X-Replay X-Bell” and “Replay Y-Replay X-Bell” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Replay-Replay-Bell”), "Black BAR-Replay X-Bell", "Replay X-Black BAR-Bell", "Replay Y-Black BAR-Bell", "Replay X-Replay X-Black BAR", "Replay Y-Replay X-Black BAR" ”,“ Black BAR-Black BAR-Bell ”,“ Replay X-Black BAR-Black BAR ”,“ Replay Y-Black BAR-Black BAR ”, and“ Black BAR-Replay X-Black BAR ”(hereinafter, follow) "Black BAR-black BAR-black BAR" (hereinafter referred to as black BAR replay). As in the first embodiment, the correct push order of RT3 transition replay of the seventh embodiment is the first left stop in the game in which the batting order replay Y1 is won, and the middle first stop and the batting order replay in the game in which the batting order replay Y2 is won. In the game where Y2 is won, it is the first stop on the right.

  In the game where the batting order replay Y (1 to 3) is won, when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay, the “replay Y-replay X-bell” or follow replay or black BAR replay is performed according to the stop operation position. Is stopped on the active line. Specifically, in the game in which the hitting order replay Y is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay and all the reels 12 are stopped in the drawing range of the black BAR symbol, the black BAR replay is effective. Stopped on the line. Hereinafter, the stop operation mode in which the black BAR replay is stopped and displayed on the active line is referred to as a correct operation mode of the black BAR replay. In addition, in the game in which the hitting order replay Y is won, the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay, and some reels 12 are stopped within the drawing range of the black BAR symbol, and the other part is the black BAR symbol. When a stop operation is performed outside the pull-in range, any of the follow replays is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, in the game in which the hitting order replay Y is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay and all the reels 12 are stopped outside the drawing range of the black BAR symbol, the “replay-replay-bell” Is stopped on the active line. In the above configuration, in the game where the batting order replay Y is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order of the RT3 transition replay, even if the stop operation is outside the drawing range of the black BAR symbol (missing eyeball), Any RT3 transition replay is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the seventh embodiment, a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the black BAR replay is instructed in the start preparation state. As described above, when the start preparation state shifts to the RT3 state, the instruction state shifts to the AT state. With the above configuration, the black BAR replay can be stopped and displayed in a game that shifts to the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the seventh embodiment, Cherry B “Black Cherry-ANY-ANY”, Cherry W “White Cherry-ANY-ANY” and Cherry R “Red Cherry-ANY-ANY” are winning. It is provided as. Note that “ANY” in FIG. 65B means all symbols. That is, the cherry B “black cherry-ANY-ANY” is displayed in accordance with the symbols stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the middle reel 12C and the right reel 12R when the black cherry symbols are stopped on the effective line of the left reel 12L. Instead, it is stopped on the active line. Similarly, the cherry W “white cherry-ANY-ANY” is displayed on the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the middle reel 12C and the right reel 12R when the white cherry symbols are stopped on the effective line of the left reel 12L. Regardless, when the red cherry symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 12L, the cherry R “red cherry-ANY-ANY” is displayed in the active line with the middle reel 12C and the right reel 12R. Regardless of the symbol that is stopped and displayed, the display is stopped on the active line.

  FIG. 65C is a diagram for explaining an effective line of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65C, the effective line of the seventh embodiment includes an upper right line and a lower right line. In the seventh embodiment described above, the symbol at the symbol position “N” on the left reel 12L or the right reel 12R has symbol positions “N−5” to “N + 1” at the stop operation position (the symbol position on the middle line during the stop operation). "Is stopped and displayed on the active line (UL1 or UL3 of the left reel 12L, UR1 or UR3 of the right reel 12R). For example, when the black BAR symbol at symbol position “16” on the left reel 12L and right reel 12R is stopped at symbol positions “11” to “17”, it is stopped and displayed on the active line. Note that the symbol at the symbol position “N” of the middle reel 12C is stopped and displayed on the active line when the stop operation position is the symbol positions “N-4” to “N”, as in the first embodiment. For example, the black BAR symbol at symbol position “16” of the middle reel 12C is stopped and displayed on the active line when the stop operation is performed at symbol positions “12” to “16”.

  In the above configuration, the cherry B, the cherry W, and the cherry R are different from each other in the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying on the active line. Specifically, since the black cherry B of the left reel 12L is located at the symbol position “19”, when the stop operation position is the symbol positions “14” to “20”, the black cherry B is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, since the white cherry W of the left reel 12L is located at the symbol position “12”, when the stop operation position is the symbol positions “07” to “13”, the white cherry W is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, since the red cherry R of the left reel 12L is located at the symbol position “05”, when the stop operation position is the symbol positions “00” to “06”, the red cherry R is stopped and displayed on the active line. As understood from the above description, the drawing range of one cherry (for example, cherry B) does not include the symbol position common to the drawing range of other cherries (for example, cherry W and cherry R). That is, there is no stop operation position where two or more kinds of cherries can be drawn simultaneously. In the seventh embodiment, the stop operation position (retraction range) at which the cherry B can stop on the active line is referred to as the correct push position of the cherry B. Similarly, the stop operation position at which the cherry W can be stopped on the effective line is referred to as the correct answer pressing position for the cherry W, and the stop operation position at which the cherry R can be stopped at the effective line is referred to as the correct answer pressing position for the cherry R. The correct answer position of each cherry (B, W, R) is notified in the AT state.

  In the seventh embodiment, instead of the batting order bells (L, C, R) of the first embodiment, cherry B, cherry W, and cherry R are won. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the number of payouts of each cherry (B, W, R) is nine and equal to each other. In addition, each cherry is won by itself. The probability that each cherry wins is equal to each other, and in the AT state where the correct answer pressing position of each cherry is indicated, it is set to a probability that the payout rate is improved as compared with the normal state. When the cherry B, cherry W or cherry R is missed, the RT1 transition symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  66 (a) and 66 (b) are conceptual diagrams of each instruction determination table (X, Y). As in the first embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines instruction information (instruction number) from the instruction determination table and displays it on the instruction display 16 in each game. Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table X and an instruction determination table Y. 66 (a) and 66 (b) are a schematic diagram of the instruction display 16 on which instruction information is displayed, and a stop operation mode (stop operation order, stop operation position) indicated by the instruction information. Indicated. Further, when determining the instruction information, the main CPU 301 transmits a second command indicating the instruction information to the sub CPU 412 as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 66A is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table X. The main CPU 301 determines the instruction information of each game in the normal state from the instruction determination table X. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the instruction number “99” is determined regardless of which winning area is won in the normal state (similar to the first embodiment). When the instruction number “99” is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display the instruction information.

  FIG. 66B is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table Y. The main CPU 301 determines the instruction information of each game in the AT state using the instruction determination table Y. Specifically, when the batting order replay Y1 is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “07”. The instruction information “07” corresponds to the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay in the game won by the batting order replay Y1. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), according to the instruction information “07”, each reel 12 is moved within the drawing range of the symbol position “16” (black BAR symbol) in the stop operation sequence of the first left stop. An instruction to stop the operation is given. In the AT state, when the batting order replay Y2 is won, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “08”. The instruction information “08” corresponds to the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay in the game won by the batting order replay Y2. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), according to the instruction information “08”, the reels 12 should be stopped within the drawing range of the symbol position “16” in the stopping order of the middle first stop. Is instructed. Further, when the batting order replay Y3 is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “09”. The instruction information “09” corresponds to the correct operation mode of the black BAR replay in the game won by the batting order replay Y3. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), according to the instruction information “09”, the reels 12 should be stopped within the drawing range of the symbol position “16” in the stop operation order of the first stop on the right. Is instructed. As described above, according to the instruction information “7” to “9” of the seventh embodiment, both the stop operation order and the stop operation position are instructed.

  When the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction information “7”, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect instructing the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information “7”. For example, in the instruction effect when the second command indicating the instruction information “7” is received, the image representing the black BAR symbol and the message “Aim from the left!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Further, when the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction information “8”, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect instructing the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information “8”. For example, in the instruction effect when the second command indicating the instruction information “8” is received, an image representing a black BAR symbol and a message “Aim from the inside!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Similarly, when the sub CPU 412 receives the second command indicating the instruction information “9”, the sub CPU 412 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to execute an instruction effect instructing the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information “9”. For example, in the instruction effect when the second command indicating the instruction information “9” is received, an image representing a black BAR symbol and a message “Aim from the right!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b), when Cherry B is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 displays instruction information “10” on the instruction display 16. The instruction information “10” corresponds to the correct answer position of cherry B. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information “10” instructs the left reel 12L to be stopped within the drawing range of the symbol position “19” (black cherry symbol). When the cherry W is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “11”. The instruction information “11” corresponds to the correct answer position of the cherry W. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information “11” instructs the left reel 12L to be stopped within the drawing range of the symbol position “12” (white cherry symbol). Further, when the cherry R is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “12”. The instruction information “12” corresponds to the correct answer position of the cherry R. In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the instruction information “12” instructs the left reel 12L to be stopped within the drawing range of the symbol position “05” (red cherry symbol).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the correct pressing position of each cherry (B, W, R) is not indicated in the normal state but is indicated in the AT state. Therefore, the AT rate is improved in the AT state than in the normal state. In the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a command that enables an effect that can greatly affect the payout rate is not transmitted from the main CPU 301 in the normal state. Specifically, in the seventh embodiment, a command that can identify the correct pressing position of the cherry won in the current game is not transmitted from the main CPU 301 in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the sub CPU 412 cannot determine the effect that instructs the correct pressing position of the cherry in accordance with the command from the main CPU 301.

  FIG. 66C is a diagram for explaining commands (first command and second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first command when the batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won in the normal state is the command “ A01 ”is common, and the second command is common to command“ B99 ”. Further, the second command when the batting order replay is won in the AT state differs depending on the type of batting order replay. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 cannot execute the instruction effect instructing the correct push order of the RT transition replay in the normal state, and executes the instruction effect instructing the correct push order of the RT transition replay in the AT state. Yes (similar to the first embodiment).

  As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the normal state, the first command when Cherry B is won is the command “A02”. Similarly, in the normal state, the first command when the cherry W is won is the command “A02”, and the first command when the cherry R is won is the command “A02”. In the normal state, the command “B99” is common to the second command when Cherry B is won, the second command when Cherry B is won, and the second command when Cherry B is won. is there. With the above configuration, the correct answer position of the cherry cannot be identified from the first command and the second command in the normal state. On the other hand, in the AT state, the second command when Cherry B is elected is the command “B10”. In the AT state, the second command when the cherry W is won is the command “B11”, and the second command when the cherry R is won is the command “B12”. With the above configuration, the correct answer position of the cherry can be identified from the second command in the AT state.

  According to 7th Embodiment, there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the correct pressing position of one winning combination is instructed by one instruction information, but the correct pressing positions of a plurality of winning combinations may be instructed by one instruction information. For example, the instruction information for instructing to stop the left reel 12L at the correct pressing position of the cherry B or the correct pressing position of the cherry W may be displayed. In the above configuration, for example, the instruction information is displayed with a probability of about 1/2 when the cherry B is won, and the instruction information is displayed with a probability of about 1/2 when the cherry W is won. According to the above configuration, a game is realized in which the player selects the white cherry or black cherry of the left reel 12L.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The main CPU 301 of the eighth embodiment transmits a winning area command (Com11-19, Com41-4C) or a group command (Com1F, Com4F) instead of the first command and the second command of the first embodiment. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining each command according to the eighth embodiment. The sub CPU 412 determines various effects including a navigation effect and an instruction effect according to the winning area command or the group command.

  As shown in FIG. 67, each command includes first data and second data. The data length of each of the first data and the second data in the present embodiment is 4 bits. That is, the data length of each command is 8 bits. However, the data length of each command can be changed as appropriate. In FIG. 67, the winning area command is described as “ComXY”. “X” of the winning area command “ComXY” is a numerical value representing the first data of the winning area command in hexadecimal. “Y” is a numerical value representing the second data of the winning area command in hexadecimal.

  Each winning area command is generated from the winning area of the current game. For example, when the batting order replay X1 is won, a winning area command Com11 having the first data “0001” and the second data “0001” is generated. When the batting order replay X2 is won, a winning area command Com12 having the first data “0001” and the second data “0010” is generated, and when the batting order replay X3 is won, the first data is the numerical value “ When a winning area command Com13 having the second data of “0011” is generated at “0001” and the hitting order replay X4 has been won, the winning area command Com14 having the first data of “0001” and the second data of “0100” is obtained. Is generated, and the winning area command Com15 having the first data value “0001” and the second data value “0101” is generated, and when the batting order replay X6 is won, the first data is stored. A winning area command Com16 having the numerical value “0001” and the second data “0110” is generated.Further, when the batting order replay Y1 is won, a winning area command Com17 having the first data “0001” and the second data “0111” is generated. When the batting order replay Y2 is won, the first data is the numerical value “ In the case where a winning area command Com18 having the second data of “1000” is generated at “0001” and the hitting order replay Y3 has been won, the winning area command Com19 having the first data of “0001” and the second data of “1001” is selected. Is generated.

  As described above, each winning area command when the batting order replay (X, Y) is won has the numerical value “0001” in common with the first data. Each winning area command when the batting order replay is won has different second data. In the above configuration, when the winning area commands Com11 to 19 are received, the sub CPU 412 can identify the winning order replay winning from the first data of the winning area command and identify the hitting order replay type from the second data. Is possible. When receiving the winning area command Com11-19, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect instructing the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay or the RT3 transition replay according to the type of batting order replay identified from the winning area command.

  When the batting order bell L1 is won, a winning area command Com41 having the first data “0100” and the second data “0001” is generated. When the hit order bell L2 is won, a winning area command Com42 having the first data “0100” and the second data “0010” is generated. When the hit order bell L3 is won, the first data is the value “0”. When the winning area command Com43 having the second data of “0011” is generated at 0100 and the batting order bell L4 has been won, the winning area command Com44 having the first data of “0100” and the second data of “0100” is obtained. Is generated. Further, when the batting order bell C1 is won, a winning area command Com45 in which the first data is the numerical value “0100” and the second data is the numerical value “0101” is generated. When the batting order bell C2 is won, the first data is the numerical value “ When the winning area command Com46 in which the second data is “0110” is generated at 0100 and the batting order bell C3 is won, the winning area command Com47 in which the first data is “0100” and the second data is “0111”. Is generated, and a winning area command Com48 in which the first data is a numerical value “0100” and the second data is a numerical value “1000” is generated. Similarly, when the batting order bell R1 is won, a winning area command Com49 in which the first data is a numerical value “0100” and the second data is a numerical value “1001” is generated, and when the batting order bell R2 is won, the first data is a numerical value. When the winning area command Com4A having the second data of “1010” is generated at “0100” and the batting order bell R3 is winning, the winning area command having the first data of “0100” and the second data of “1011” When Com4B is generated and the batting order bell R4 is won, a winning area command Com4C in which the first data is a numerical value “0100” and the second data is a numerical value “1100” is generated.

  As described above, in each winning area command when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won, the first data is the numerical value “0100” in common. In addition, the second data is different from each other in each winning area command when the batting order bell is won. In the above configuration, when the winning area commands Com41 to 4C are received, the sub CPU 412 can identify the winning of the batting order bell from the first data of the winning area command and identify the type of the batting order bell from the second data. Is possible. When the sub CPU 412 receives the winning area commands Com41 to 4C, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect instructing the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell according to the batting order bell identified from the winning area command.

  When the batting order replay or batting order bell is won in the AT state, the main CPU 301 generates the above-mentioned winning area commands (Com 11 to 19 and Com 41 to 4C) and transmits them to the sub CPU 412. On the other hand, when the hit order replay or hit order bell is won in the normal state, the main CPU 301 generates winning area commands (Com 11-19, Com 41-4C), and generates group commands (Com 1F, Com 4F) from the winning area commands. To do. In the normal state, when the batting order replay or batting order bell is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a group command to the sub CPU 412 instead of the winning area command. That is, in the normal state, each winning area command (Com 11-19, Com 41-4C) is not transmitted.

  Specifically, when the batting order replay (X1 to X6, Y1 to Y3) is won in the normal state, a group command Com1F is generated from the winning area commands Com11 to 19, as shown in FIG. The sub CPU 412 can identify from the group command Com1F that the batting order replay has been won, but cannot identify the type (9 types) of the batting order replay. Therefore, the correct pressing order of the RT transition replay is not identified from the group command Com1F. With the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 cannot determine the instruction effect that instructs the correct answer pressing order of the RT transition replay by the group command Com1F.

  When the batting order bells (L1 to L4, C1 to C4, R1 to R4) are won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 67, group commands Com4F are generated from the winning area commands Com41 to 4C. The sub CPU 412 can identify from the group command Com4F that one of the hitting bells has been won, but cannot identify the type of the hitting bell (which of the 12 types). Accordingly, the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is not identified from the group command Com4F. With the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 cannot determine the instruction effect that instructs the correct pressing order of the middle bell by the group command Com4F.

  In the present embodiment, the group command is generated by masking the winning area command. Specifically, the numerical value “1” is ORed to each bit of the second data of the winning area command. In the above configuration, the second data (after calculation) of the group command is a numerical value “1111” regardless of the second data (before calculation) of the winning area command. Therefore, when the batting order replay is won, the group command Com1F is generated in common regardless of the type of batting order replay. When the batting order bell is won, the group command Com4F is generated in common regardless of the type of batting order bell. The type of winning area (winning area number) cannot be identified from the above group commands.

  According to the eighth embodiment, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained. Note that the method for generating the group command is not limited to the above configuration, and an appropriate method may be adopted if the type of the hit order replay and the hit order bell cannot be identified. For example, a numerical value “0” may be ANDed for each bit of the second data of the winning area command. In the above configuration, the second data of the group command is “0000” regardless of the winning area command. The type of winning area is not identified from the above group commands.

<Ninth Embodiment>
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining a display on the liquid crystal display device and the instruction display 16 in the bonus notification state in the ninth embodiment. In the bonus notification state, a message that the bonus combination is won is displayed in the region RX of the liquid crystal display device 30. For example, in the region RX, a message “BOUNUS confirmed” and a graphic representing the bonus combination symbol combination “Red Seven-Red Seven-Red Seven” are displayed. For example, the region RX is located near the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30.

  FIG. 68A shows the display on the liquid crystal display device 30 and the instruction display 16 when a non-group winning area (BAR replay, normal replay, cherry, watermelon, common bell, chance) is won in the bonus notification state. It is a figure for demonstrating. When a non-group winning area is won in the bonus notification state, the type of the non-group winning area is notified in the area RY of the liquid crystal display device 30. The region RY is located on the lower right side of the region RX, for example. Note that the position of the region RY can be changed as appropriate. Also, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the non-group winning area is won in the bonus notification state, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction display 16.

  The screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 in FIG. 68A is a specific example when a cherry (strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the non-group winning area. In the above case, a graphic image representing a cherry symbol is displayed in the region RY. When the watermelon is won, a graphic representing the watermelon symbol is displayed in the area RY. When the common bell is elected, a graphic representing the bell symbol is displayed. When the weak chance or the strong chance is won, for example, a message “chance” is displayed in the area RY. In addition, the method of alert | reporting the kind of non-group winning area is not limited to the above example.

  In the above configuration, when the winning combination is notified in the region RX and the winning area is not notified in the region RY (when the winning area “losing” is determined), the stop operation in which the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Embodiments are most advantageous. On the other hand, when the winning of the bonus combination is notified in the region RX and the winning of the watermelon combination is notified in the region RY, the stop operation mode in which the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line is most advantageous. As understood from the above description, in the bonus notification state, in the game in which the instruction information is not displayed, it is configured to be able to execute an effect instructing a stop operation mode for improving the payout rate. In the above configuration, there remains room for fraudulent acts that illegally generate notifications of types of non-group winning areas and increase the payout rate. However, the effect of notifying the type of the non-group winning area has less influence on the payout rate than the instruction effect of notifying the correct pressing order of the batting order bell, for example. Therefore, the influence of the notification of the type of the non-group winning area in the bonus notification state on the payout rate is limited, and the above-described fraud is suppressed.

  FIG. 68B is a diagram for explaining display on the liquid crystal display device 30 and the instruction display 16 when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won in the bonus notification state. When the batting order bell is won in the bonus notification state, the instruction image SY1 is displayed below the area RX of the liquid crystal display device 30. In the above configuration, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is notified by the instruction image Y1 as in the AT state and the start preparation state. Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), when the batting order bell is won in the bonus notification state, the instruction information corresponding to the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is displayed on the instruction display 16.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the bonus operating state starts, the bonus notification state ends. However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, an illegal act is assumed in which a bonus operation is stopped in a stop operation mode in which the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line, and the bonus notification state in which the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell is instructed is intentionally extended. The Therefore, the bonus notification state of the ninth embodiment is configured to end under a predetermined end condition in addition to the case where the bonus operation state starts. Specifically, when the winning area “losing” is won, the bonus notification state is terminated. According to the above configuration, the above-described fraud is suppressed.

<Modification>
Each of the above forms can be variously modified. Specific modifications are exemplified below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the following examples can be appropriately combined.

(1) In each of the above forms, the AT state is constituted by the AT state, the start preparation state, the end preparation state, and the bonus notification state. However, the instruction state constituting the AT state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the bonus notification state may be omitted from the AT state. Moreover, the start trigger and the end trigger of each instruction state can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment, when the AT counter is subtracted to the numerical value “0”, the AT state is ended, but the AT counter is subtracted to the numerical value “0” and the end is completed by a predetermined end lottery. If determined, the AT state may be terminated.

(2) The normal state may be configured from a low-probability normal state and a high-probability normal state that is easier to win the AT state than the low-probability normal state. In the above configuration, if you win a weak rare role or a strong rare role in a low probability normal state, transition to a high probability normal state with a predetermined probability, if you win a batting order bell in a high probability normal state, It is good also as a structure which transfers to a low probability normal state with a predetermined probability.

(3) In each of the above forms, when the winning area “duplicate bonus” is won, the bonus combination and the watermelon combination are selected and won. However, the bonus combination may be won by overlapping with other winning combinations. However, from the viewpoint of illegally informing the winning of the duplicate bonus and suppressing the act of raising the payout rate illegally, the winning combination that is won in duplicate with the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in a specific operation mode. A winning combination (for example, horn cherry, middle stage cherry) or a winning combination (for example, 1-sheet combination A, 1-sheet combination B) having a smaller number of payouts than the prescribed number (3) required to start a game is suitable.

(4) In each above-mentioned form, the opportunity (RT transition symbol) that RT state shifts can be changed suitably. For example, when the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, it may be configured to shift to a specific RT state. That is, the symbol combination “star bell-watermelon-black BAR” serving as a watermelon may be used as the RT transition symbol. The RT state when the watermelon combination is stopped and displayed on the active line has, for example, a higher probability of replay than the RT1 state, and ends with a predetermined number of games (for example, five games).

  However, a configuration in which the sub CPU 412 cannot notify the stop operation mode in which a specific RT transition symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal state is preferable. For example, when the symbol combination related to a specific winning combination is an RT transition symbol, a configuration in which the sub CPU 412 cannot determine the winning notification of the specific winning combination is preferable. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the first command that can identify the winning of the single player B is transmitted to the sub CPU 412. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can notify the winning of the single winning combination B, and by the winning notification of the single winning combination B, the player can stop-display the single winning combination B on the active line. However, if the single winning combination B is an RT transition symbol, the winning notification of the single winning combination B can greatly affect the payout rate. In the above case, an illegal act of analyzing the first command by an illegal method and executing the winning notification of the single player B becomes a problem. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the first embodiment described above, in the normal state, the winning notification of the single player B can be executed by the sub CPU 412, while the single player B is not the RT transition symbol.

(5) The instruction information is not limited to the above forms. For example, in the first embodiment, numbers “1” to “12” are displayed as instruction information, but an alphabet may be displayed as instruction information. Further, the operation error information is not limited to the above forms. For example, in the first embodiment, the symbol “-” (two hyphens) is displayed as the operation error information, but numbers or alphabets may be used as the operation error information.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, information other than the instruction information (the number of payouts, the total number of medals in the bonus operating state, and the type of error) is displayed on the instruction display. However, only the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display. May be displayed. Further, the type of information displayed on the instruction display is not limited to each of the above forms. For example, the instruction display may display the remaining number of games in the AT state.

  By the way, in the configuration in which information other than the instruction information (hereinafter referred to as “specific information”) is displayed on the instruction display, the display condition of the specific information may be satisfied during the display period of the instruction information. For example, when an error is detected during the instruction information display period, a condition for displaying the type of error (specific information) is established during the instruction information display period. In the above configuration, a configuration in which whether the instruction information is displayed with priority over the specific information or the specific information with priority over the instruction information is determined in advance according to the type of the specific information. For example, when an error is detected during the display period of the instruction information, a configuration in which the error type is displayed with priority over the instruction information is preferable. According to the above configuration, even during the display period of the instruction information, the type of error is notified by the instruction display.

(7) In the above embodiments, the instruction information is not displayed in the normal state. However, even in the normal state, when it becomes impossible to perform the stop operation in the stop operation mode corresponding to the instruction information in the current game, the instruction information may be displayed thereafter. For example, in a period after the third stop operation, the display of the instruction information corresponding to the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell may be started. In the above configuration, since the instruction information is not displayed at the time when the stop operation can be performed in the correct pressing order of the middle bell (before the first stop operation), the player understands the instruction information and then performs the first stop operation. I can't. Therefore, in the above configuration, like the above-described embodiments, in the normal state, the payout rate cannot be improved by the instruction information.

  In addition, even in the normal state, in the current game, when it becomes impossible to perform stop operation in the correct answer pressing order (correct answer pressing position) in the winning area, a command that can identify the correct answer pressing order thereafter The main CPU 301 may be configured to transmit to the sub CPU 412. For example, in a period after the third stop operation, a command that can identify the correct pressing order of the middle bell in the current game may be transmitted. According to the above configuration, for example, an effect after the third stop operation can be determined according to the correct answer pressing order of the middle bell of the current game. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the effects after the third stop operation.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the indication display is provided on the panel 10, but the location where the indication display is provided can be changed as appropriate. For example, an instruction indicator may be provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 30. Moreover, you may provide an instruction | indication indicator in the waist | hip | lumbar part panel 6 or the saucer unit 7. FIG. However, the player usually plays a game while watching each reel 12 or the liquid crystal display device 30. Therefore, for example, when the indication display is provided on the waist panel 6 or the tray unit 7, the indication information is difficult to visually recognize compared to the case where the indication display is provided on the panel 10 (in the vicinity of each reel 12). Can occur. Therefore, in the configuration in which the indication display is provided in the waist panel 6 or the tray unit 7, a configuration in which the stop operation mode indicated by the instruction information is notified in the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like is preferable.

(9) The instruction display is not limited to the above-described forms. For example, the instruction display 16 of the first embodiment is configured by two 7-segment displays, and the instruction display 70 (see FIG. 64) of the sixth embodiment is configured by three 7-segment displays. However, the instruction display may be composed of one 7-segment display or four or more 7-segment displays. Furthermore, the instruction display may be configured other than a 7-segment display. For example, an image display device may be employed as the instruction display. As the image display device, a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix type display composed of a plurality of LEDs can be adopted.

  FIG. 69A is a simulation diagram of the instruction display 90 in the modified example. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the indicator display 90 of the modified example is composed of one 7-segment display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69A, the instruction display 90 includes a segment LA, a segment LB, a segment LC, a segment LD, a segment LE, a segment LF, and a segment LG. In FIG. 69 (a), the segments L (B, E) to be lit are displayed by shading. In the specific example of FIG. 69 (a), instruction information (described later) for displaying the first left stop among the instruction information is shown.

  FIG. 69B is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table according to a modification. The main CPU 301 of the modified example determines an instruction number from the instruction determination table in each game, and displays instruction information corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction display 90. In the instruction information of the modified example, as shown in FIG. 69B, various stop operation orders are instructed (similar to the first embodiment). FIG. 69 (b) shows a segment L that is turned on and a segment L that is turned off when each stop operation order is instructed. Specifically, a segment that is turned off when the stop operation order is instructed is indicated by a numerical value “1”, and a segment that is turned off when the stop operation order is indicated is indicated by “0”. For example, when instructing the first left stop, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the segment LA, the segment LC, the segment LD, the segment LF, and the segment LG are turned off, and the segment LB and the segment LE are turned on.

  The modification shown in FIG. 69 has an advantage that the number of 7-segment displays can be reduced as compared with the case where the instruction display is configured by two or more 7-segment displays. However, when the instruction display is configured by one 7-segment display, the number of types of instruction information that can be displayed is reduced. For example, assume a configuration in which numbers “0” to “9” are displayed on each 7-segment display. With the above configuration, the instruction display unit configured by two 7-segment displays can display 100 types of instruction information from the number “00” to the number “99”. On the other hand, an instruction display unit composed of one 7-segment can display 10 types of instruction information from the number “0” to the number “9”. That is, in the above-described configuration, there is a problem in the case where it is necessary to display 10 or more types of instruction information in the instruction display configured with one 7-segment display. In view of the above circumstances, in the modification shown in FIG. 69, information other than numerals (for example, information shown in FIG. 69A) can be displayed as instruction information. According to the above modification, more than 10 types of instruction information can be displayed on one 7-segment display (12 types in the example of FIG. 69).

  By the way, when information other than numbers is used as instruction information, there is a problem that it is difficult to determine the stop operation order corresponding to each instruction information, compared to the case where numbers are used as instruction information. Therefore, in a configuration in which information other than numbers is used as the instruction information, a configuration in which the stop operation order corresponding to the instruction information is notified by an instruction effect such as the liquid crystal display device 30 (for example, each instruction effect in the first embodiment). Is preferred. According to the above configuration, the liquid crystal display device 30 can clearly notify the stop operation order corresponding to the instruction information while increasing the number of types of instruction information that can be displayed on the instruction display. In the modification described above, some or all of the plurality of instruction information may be numbers.

(10) In each embodiment described above, the method for displaying the instruction information in the instruction display period TS can be changed as appropriate. FIG. 70A is a diagram for describing a method of displaying instruction information in the instruction display period TS in the modification. FIG. 70A shows a specific example of instructing the stop operation order “left middle right”. Further, in the modification of FIG. 70 (a), it is assumed that a one-digit 7-segment display is adopted as an instruction display.

  In the modification of FIG. 70 (a), one stop button 25 to be stopped is instructed at each point of the instruction display period TS. Specifically, immediately after the game start operation is performed, instruction information corresponding to the stop button 25 to be subjected to the first stop operation is displayed on the instruction display. Further, immediately after the first stop operation is performed, instruction information corresponding to the stop operation button 25 to be subjected to the second stop operation is displayed on the instruction display, and immediately after the second stop operation is performed. The instruction information corresponding to the stop operation button 25 to be third stopped is displayed on the instruction display. When the third stop operation is performed, the instruction display is not displayed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 70A, a case is assumed in which a stop operation order “left middle right” is instructed. In the above configuration, the instruction information “7” corresponds to the left stop button 25L, the instruction information “8” corresponds to the middle stop button 25C, and the instruction information “9” corresponds to the right stop button 25R. When each instruction information is displayed, a stop operation of the stop button 25 corresponding to the instruction information is instructed. For example, in the example of FIG. 70A, the instruction information “7” is displayed on the instruction display immediately after the game start operation is performed, and the instruction information is displayed on the instruction display immediately after the first stop operation is performed. “8” is displayed, and immediately after the second stop operation is performed, the instruction information “9” is displayed on the instruction display. In the above example, the stop operation order is “middle left / right” by stopping the stop button 25 indicated at each time point.

(11) FIG. 70B is a diagram for explaining a method of displaying instruction information in the instruction display period TS in another modification. FIG. 70B shows a specific example in which the winning area number “12” (batting order bell L) is displayed as instruction information. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 70B, the order of the first left stop is instructed. Further, in the modification of FIG. 70 (b), it is assumed that a one-digit 7-segment display is adopted as an instruction display.

  In the modified example of FIG. 70 (b), the indication display is automatically switched at predetermined time intervals in the indication display period TS. Specifically, the instruction display switches and displays the tenth digit of the winning area number and the first digit of the winning area number. For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the instruction display displays the number “1” immediately after the game start operation is performed. Thereafter, the instruction display unit displays the number “2” instead of the number “1” when a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the indication display is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number “2” was displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the non-display state, the indication display again switches between the numbers “1” and “2” and displays them. That is, the instruction display unit has a predetermined time length cycle (hereinafter referred to as “display cycle TY”), and the winning area number tens digit (number “1”) and first digit (number “2”). )) Repeatedly.

  A period TX shown in FIG. 70 (b) is a period from when the game start operation is performed to when the stop operation reception period starts. The period TX includes, for example, a wait period and an acceleration period. As described above, from the viewpoint of suppressing operation mistakes, it is preferable that the instruction information (winning area number) is displayed before the start time of the stop operation reception period. If the time length of the display cycle TY is longer than the time length of the period TX, only the tens place (number “1”) of the instruction information is displayed before the start of the stop operation reception period, and the first place of the instruction information ( The number “2”) may not be displayed before the start of the stop operation acceptance period. In the above case, the instruction information is not displayed so as to be identifiable to the player. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the modified example of FIG. 70B, the time length of the display cycle TY is shorter than the minimum value of the time length of the period TX.

  According to the above configuration, the instruction information is displayed in an identifiable manner before the stop operation reception period. In the above modification, the display cycle TY may be sufficiently small (for example, the display cycle TY = 2 ms) so that the player can hardly identify the instruction information. In the above configuration, since the stop operation mode is difficult to identify from the instruction information, for example, the player can pay attention to the instruction effect of the liquid crystal display device 30.

(12) The time point at which the display of the instruction information is started is sufficient as long as it is before the time point when the stop operation can be performed, and the present invention is not limited to each of the above forms. Moreover, it is sufficient that the time point when the instruction effect is started is before the time point when the stop operation is possible, and the present invention is not limited to the above-described forms. Further, the time point at which the display of the instruction information is finished is not limited to the above forms. For example, the instruction information may be continuously displayed after the symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed.

(13) In the first embodiment described above, the instruction display 16 displays instruction information for instructing that the stop button 25 should be operated in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Instruction information “10” indicating that the stop operation should be performed in the order of the first stop or the middle first stop, or instruction information “10” indicating that the stop operation should be performed in the order of the left first stop or the right first stop 11 ”or the instruction information“ 12 ”indicating that the stop operation should be performed in the order of middle first stop or right first stop is shown on the instruction display 16. However, the above configuration is not limited to the example of the first embodiment.

  71 (a-1) and 71 (a-2) are diagrams for explaining a modification in which instruction information for instructing the first operation mode and the second operation mode is displayed. FIG. 71 (a-1) is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table A of a modification. The main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table A in each game in the normal state. Specifically, when the batting order replay X1 or the batting order replay X2 is won, the instruction number “31” is determined with a probability of about 1/100, and the instruction number “99” is determined with a probability of about 99/100. Further, when determining the instruction number “31”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “31”. As described above, the correct push order of the RT2 transition replay in the game won by the batting order replay X1 is “left middle right”, and the correct push order of the RT2 transition replay in the game won by the batting order replay X2 is “middle left and right”. It is. In the above configuration, when the instruction information “31” is displayed, the player performs a stop operation in the order of “left middle right” or “middle left and right”. That is, in the above configuration, it can be said that the instruction information “31” instructs the stop operation in the order of “left middle right” or “right and left middle”. Similarly, when the batting order replay X3 (RT2 transition replay correct answer pressing order “middle left and right”) or batting order replay X4 (RT2 transition replay correct answer pressing order “middle right left”) is won, the instruction number “ 32 ”and the instruction number“ 99 ”is determined with a probability of about 99/100. When determining the instruction number “32”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “32”. In the above configuration, the instruction information “32” instructs the stop operation in the order of “middle left and right” or “middle right and left”. In addition, when the hitting order replay X5 (RT2 transition replay correct pressing order “right middle left”) or batting order replay X6 (RT2 transition replay correct pressing order “right middle left”) is won, the instruction number “ 33 ”and the instruction number“ 99 ”is determined with a probability of about 99/100. When determining the instruction number “33”, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the instruction information “33”. In the above configuration, the instruction information “33” indicates that the stop operation should be performed in the order of “middle right” or “middle right”. Note that the probabilities of determining the instruction numbers “31” to “33” can be changed as appropriate.

  In the above modification, a privilege is given when a stop operation can be performed in the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay in the game in which the instruction information “31” to “33” is displayed (when two answers are selected correctly). Specifically, when the stop operation can be performed in the correct pressing order of the RT2 transition replay in the game in which the instruction information is displayed, the transition to the AT state is determined.

  FIG. 71 (a-2) is a diagram for explaining an example of display on the liquid crystal display device 30 when the instruction number “31” is determined. When any one of the instruction numbers “31” to “33” is determined, the message indicating that the state shifts to the AT state is displayed by stopping the RT2 transition replay “Replay-Bell-Bell” on the active line. 30. When any of the instruction numbers “31” to “33” is determined, each instruction image S (X1, A) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Specifically, two instruction graphic images SA and one instruction graphic image SX1 are arranged in the left-right direction and displayed, and the stop operation order is instructed by the arrangement order of the instruction graphic image SA and the instruction graphic image SX1. . Specifically, when the instruction number “31” is determined, as shown in FIG. 71 (a-2), the instruction image SX1 is displayed on the left end side of the liquid crystal display device 30, and each instruction image SX1 is displayed on the right side of the instruction image SX1. An instruction image SA is arranged. In the above case, the character string “1,?,?” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30, and an instruction is given to stop operation in the order of “left middle right” or “left middle right”. Although illustration is omitted, when the instruction number “32” is determined, the character string “?, 1,?” Is displayed, and “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” is instructed to stop. Similarly, when the instruction number “33” is determined, the character string “?,?, 1” is displayed, and an instruction to stop the operation is given with “middle right” or “middle right”.

  FIG. 71 (b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the instruction determination table C of the modification example. The main CPU 301 determines an instruction number using the instruction determination table C in each game in the end preparation state. In the modified example of FIG. 71 (b-1), as in the first embodiment, when the batting order bell (L, C, R) is won, the instruction number “10” for instructing the left first stop or the middle first stop. ”And the instruction number“ 11 ”instructing the first left stop or the first right stop and the instruction number“ 12 ”instructing the first middle stop or the first right stop are determined with a predetermined probability. In the game for which the instruction number is determined, a pushing order application effect E (see FIG. 28) is executed. However, the modification of FIG. 71 (b-1) is different from the first embodiment in that the instruction number “99” (no instruction) can be determined when the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (b-1), when the batting order bell L is won, the instruction number “10” is determined with a probability of about 1/3, and the instruction number “11” with a probability of about 1/3. The instruction number “99” is determined with a probability of about 1/3. When the batting order bell C is won, the instruction number “10” is determined with a probability of about 1/3, the instruction number “12” is determined with a probability of about 1/3, and the instruction number “99” with a probability of about 1/3. Is determined. When the batting order bell R is won, the instruction number “11” is determined with a probability of about 1/3, the instruction number “12” is determined with a probability of about 1/3, and the instruction number “99” is determined with a probability of about 1/3. It is determined.

  In the above configuration, when any of the instruction numbers “10” to “11” is determined in the game in which the hitting order bell is won, the AT state is continued by correctly answering the two-stop operation sequence. On the other hand, if the instruction number “99” is determined in the game in which the batting order bell is won, the AT state is continued by correctly answering the three choices. Therefore, since the probability that the AT state continues (probability 1/2 or probability 1/3) changes in the game in which the batting order bell is won, the gameability is improved compared to the configuration in which the probability that the AT state continues does not change. Can be made.

  FIG. 71 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining an example of display on the liquid crystal display device 30 when the batting order bell is won and the instruction number “99” is determined in the end preparation state. As described above with reference to FIG. 28, in each pressing order application effect E, the stop button 25 to be subjected to the first stop operation can be identified by the arrangement of the two instruction graphic images SA and the single instruction graphic image SB. Specifically, the stop button 25 that should not be subjected to the first stop operation can be identified by the arrangement of the instruction image SB (symbol “×”). On the other hand, in the case where the batting order bell is won in the end preparation state and the instruction number “99” is determined, as shown in FIG. 71 (b-2), three instruction icon images SA are arranged, and the first The stop button 25 that should not be stopped cannot be identified. In the above configuration, a specific stop operation order is not instructed.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, when a stop operation (stop operation error) is performed outside the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information, a specific image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. For example, when the player makes an operation mistake, a message “miss” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. Hereinafter, an image for notifying the player of an operation error is referred to as an “operation error image”.

  In the first embodiment, when the player makes an operation mistake, the operation error information is displayed on the instruction display 16 (see FIG. 20). In the above configuration, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display an image at the time of an operation mistake when the player makes an operation mistake, or may continuously display an instruction effect image. In the third embodiment, when the player makes an operation mistake, the instruction display 16 is not displayed (see FIG. 61). In the above configuration, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display an image at the time of an operation mistake when the player makes an operation mistake, or may continuously display an instruction effect image. In the fourth embodiment, even if the player makes an operation mistake, the instruction display 16 continues to display the instruction information (see FIG. 62). In the above configuration, the liquid crystal display device 30 may display an image at the time of an operation mistake when the player makes an operation mistake, or may continuously display an instruction effect image.

(15) In each of the above forms, the instruction information is not displayed when a watermelon role, a cherry role (corner cherry, middle-tiered cherry), and a one-piece role (A, B) (non-group winning area) are won. However, the instruction information may be displayed when the non-group winning area is won. For example, when a non-group winning area is won, the winning area number of the winning area may be displayed as instruction information. Further, the instruction information when the non-group winning area is won may be displayed in the AT state or may be displayed in the normal state.

  In order to realize the above configuration, for example, a stop operation miss command transmitted when there is a stop operation error is provided, and the main CPU 301 is configured to transmit a stop operation miss command when there is a stop operation error. Conceivable. In the above configuration, when a stop operation error command is received by the sub-control board 400, for example, an image informing the stop operation error is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. In addition, in the configuration in which an image for notifying a stop operation error is displayed, the above-described stop operation error command may not be provided. For example, an image for notifying a stop operation error may be displayed in accordance with the stop operation command indicating the type of the stop button that has been stopped and the second command. For example, it is assumed that the stop operation order indicated by the second command is the left first stop. In the above case, when the stop operation command for the left stop button 25L is not received first, an image for informing the stop operation error is displayed. The above configuration has an advantage that operation error commands are reduced.

(16) In each of the above forms, the number of games from the winning of the bonus combination to the transition to the AT state (bonus notification state) is three, but the number of games to the transition to the AT state is appropriately It can be changed. Alternatively, the number of games from when a bonus combination is won until the transition to the bonus notification state may be determined by lottery. In the above configuration, the number of games until the transition to the bonus notification state is variable. In the above configuration, the number of games for continuous production may be variable depending on the number of games until the transition to the bonus notification state.

(17) In the fourth embodiment, the winning area number (type of batting order bell) is exemplified as information that enables the upper bell to be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the stop operation is performed in the middle-bell dismissal order. However, the information that enables the upper bell to be stopped and displayed is not limited to the winning area number. For example, the symbol position of each symbol of the upper bell may be displayed. In the above configuration, for example, when the upper bell 4 “replay x-white BAR-white BAR” can be stopped and displayed in this game, the symbol position “2, 12, 16, 19” of the replay x symbol of the left reel 12L. The symbol position “16” of the white BAR symbol of the middle reel 12C and the symbol position “19” of the right reel 12R are displayed on the indication display 16. As a specific aspect of the above configuration, when the striking order bell is won, the correct pressing order of the middle bell is notified, and then when the stop operation is performed in the losing pressing order, the symbol position of each symbol of the upper bell is displayed. A configuration is assumed. In the above configuration, for example, when the batting order bell L is won, first, instruction information for instructing the first left stop is displayed. Thereafter, when the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 25L, the symbol position of each symbol of the upper bell is displayed on the instruction display instead of the instruction information instructing the first left stop. According to the above configuration, the upper bell can be stopped and displayed on the active line even when the middle bell is stopped in the order in which the middle bell is pushed as in the fourth embodiment.

(18) The present invention can be applied not only to the above-described pachislot machines but also to pachinko machines, other gaming machines, and game machines in general.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention displays a start operation means (start lever 24) that is operated when a game is started and a plurality of types of symbols when the game is started, as well as symbols as a result of the game. and stop display, variable display means combination (each reel 12), the stop operation means is stopped operating when stopping displaying the symbols (the respective stop buttons 25) can be charged-up means game media (medal shooter 8) and a game can be started when a game medium is inserted, and in each game, there are a plurality of types of winning areas including a first winning area, a second winning area, a third winning area, and a fourth winning area. winning area determined by lottery from, when determining the symbol combination stopped and displayed, it is determined that the winning symbol combination including the particular winning symbol combination stopped and displayed, corresponding to the winning symbol combination With paid out game media payout number that, when the replay symbol combination including certain replay symbol combination is determined to have been stopped and displayed without paid out gaming media, the same number as the game media used in this game When the game medium is automatically inserted and the first winning area is won and the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode. In some cases, the specific winning symbol combination may not be stopped and displayed. In the game won in the second winning area, the specific replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation, and in the game in which the third winning area is won. Regardless of whether the operation is stopped in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the game in which the fourth winning area is won stops in either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Be created, without stopping display the winning symbol combination, as well as a possible transition to indication state and a non-indication state, the main control unit comprises a command transmitting means for transmitting various commands and (main CPU 301), the main control unit Sub-control means (sub-CPU 412) controlled by various commands from, instruction information that can be controlled by the main control means and can specify a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying a specific winning symbol combination, and specific replay A plurality of types of instruction information including instruction information that can specify a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying a symbol combination can be displayed, and when a winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning symbol combination Specific display means (instruction display 16) for displaying payout quantity information that can specify the main control means In the game in which the first winning area is determined, the instruction information can be displayed on the specific display means at least during the period from when the stop operation means can be operated until the last stop operation means is operated. After the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the specific display means is controlled over a predetermined time length in a specific display mode that is different from the instruction information and different from the payout number information, and then a specific operation is performed. It is possible to display the payout number information on the specific display means without requiring a game, and in the game in which the second winning area is determined, at least the stop operation means can be operated, and the last stop operation means is operated. when the time to, and capable of displaying instruction information to a specific display means, after a particular replay symbol combination stopped and displayed, a non-display the instruction information, the predetermined Long, Ri duration der the player can recognize that a particular display means are controlled in a particular display mode, the command transmitting means, third prize area sends the first command in the game the player wins the game, the 4 The second command is transmitted in the game won by the winning area, the third command that can specify the first operation mode is transmitted in the designated state in the game won by the first winning area, and the second command is transmitted in the non-instructed state. When a fourth command whose operation mode cannot be specified is transmitted, the sub-control means receives a first command in a specific game in which the main control means is in a non-instructed state, and includes a plurality of kinds of effects including the first effect. When the second command is received and the second command is received, any one of a plurality of effects including the second effect and not including the first effect is determined and the fourth command is received. 2 production Determining one of the plurality of types of production which does not include only the first effect.

  According to the above configuration, the stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed by the specific display means controlled by the main control means. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the sub-control means, the stop operation mode can be notified by the specific display means controlled by the main control means. According to the configuration of the present invention, the specific display means notifies the payout number in addition to the stop operation mode. Therefore, for example, the number of display means can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which display means for notifying the stop operation mode and display means for notifying the number of payouts are provided separately.

  By the way, in the configuration in which the stop operation mode and the payout number are displayed by one specific display means, when the payout number is notified immediately after the stop operation mode, the stop operation mode is notified or the number of payouts is notified. The inconvenience that it is easy to confuse is assumed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present invention controls the specific display means for the instruction information, and after the symbol combination related to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the identification is different from the instruction information and is different from the payout number information. In the display mode, the specific display means is controlled over a predetermined length of time, and thereafter, the specific display means can be controlled to the payout number information without requiring a specific operation. According to the above configuration, it is easy to recognize that the instruction information is switched to the payout number information. Therefore, the inconvenience described above is suppressed.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 300 ... Main control board, 301 ... Main CPU, 302 ... Main ROM, 303 ... Main RAM, 304 ... Random number generator, 305 ... I / F circuit, 400 ... Sub control board, 410 ... Production control board 411 ... I / F circuit, 412 ... sub CPU, 413 ... sub ROM, 414 ... sub RAM, 420 ... image control board, 421 ... image control CPU, 422 ... image control ROM, 423 ... VDP, 424 ... CGROM, 425 ... RAM, 430 ... sound board, 431 ... sound source IC, 432 ... sound source ROM.

Claims (1)

A start operation means operated when starting a game;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols when a game is started and capable of stopping and displaying symbol combinations as a result of the game,
A stop operation means is stopped operating when stopping displaying the symbols,
An input means capable of input game media;
A game can be started when a game medium is inserted, and in each game, a lottery is selected from a plurality of types of winning areas including a first winning area, a second winning area, a third winning area, and a fourth winning area. When the area is determined , the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is determined, and it is determined that the winning symbol combination including the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the payout number of game media corresponding to the winning symbol combination is paid out, When it is determined that the replay symbol combination including the specific replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the same number of game media as the game media used in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out the game media . In the game where one winning area is won, when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode, the specific operation is performed. There is a case where the winning symbol combination is not stopped, the game in which the second winning area is won, the specific re-playing symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation, and the game in which the third winning area is won. In the game in which the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the fourth winning area, regardless of whether the first operating mode or the second operating mode is stopped, the first operating mode and the second operating mode are displayed. A main control means comprising command transmitting means for transmitting various commands and capable of transitioning to an instructed state and a non-instructed state without stopping and displaying the winning symbol combination in any of the two operation modes. ,
A sub-control means controlled by said various commands from the main control means,
Controlled by the main control means, it is possible to specify instruction information that can specify a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the specific winning symbol combination, and a stop operation mode for stopping and displaying the specific replay symbol combination A specific display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of instruction information including instruction information and displaying payout number information capable of specifying a payout number corresponding to the winning symbol combination when the winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed; Comprising
In the game in which the first winning area has been determined, the main control means displays the instruction information at least during a period from when the stop operation means can be operated until the last stop operation means is operated. The specific display means can be displayed on the specific display means, and after the specific winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the specific display means is preset in a specific display mode that is different from the instruction information and different from the payout number information. The payout amount information can be displayed on the specific display means without requiring a specific operation, and at least the stop operation means in the game in which the second winning area is determined. The instruction information can be displayed on the specific display means during a period from when the operation of the last stop operation means until the last stop operation means is operated, After a particular replay symbol combination stopped and displayed, a non-display the instruction information,
The length of time that is determined in advance, Ri duration der the player can recognize that the particular display means being controlled by the particular display mode,
The command transmission means transmits a first command in a game won by the third winning area, transmits a second command in a game won by the fourth winning area, and in a game won by the first winning area. In the instruction state, a third command that can specify the first operation mode is transmitted. In the non-instruction state, a fourth command that cannot specify the first operation mode is transmitted.
When the main control means receives the first command in the specific game in the non-instructed state, the sub control means determines one of a plurality of kinds of effects including a first effect, and When two commands are received, any one of a plurality of types of effects including the second effect and not including the first effect is determined, and when the fourth command is received, the first effect is included including the second effect. A gaming machine that determines any of a plurality of types of effects not including effects .

Images